Home

magicolor 2590MF - Printers

image

Contents

1. Bit 3 No Designation DIS DTC DCS 9 17 PONE Data signalling rate Bit No Data signalling rate 5 18117 greng 18117 8 n olo Sean line length 215 mm olo Scan line length 215 1 mm 1 Scan line length 215 mm Scan line length 255 11 1 mm 1 011 and scan line length 255 s line length 303 can line leng width mm 196 1 0 mm 196 18 Capapitues Scan line length 215 mm 4 1 Invalid 1 110 and scan line length 255 mm 1 and scan line length 303 mm 1 1 1 Invalid 19 Bit No Bit No Recording length capabil 20119 Recording length capability 20119 ity 0 0 A4 297 mm 0 0 A4 297 mm length o 4 Ad 297 mm and 364 0 1 B4 364 mm mm 1 0 Unlimited 1 O Unlimited 1 1 Invalid 1 4 Invalid 21 55 Bit Minimum scan line time Bit No Minimum scan line time 23 22 21 capability at the receive 23 22 21 o o 20 ms at 3 85 t mm T 7 7 3 85 20 0 0 0 20 ms ms 0 0 1 5 5 0 0 1 5 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 0 1 0 10 ms 5 10 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 10 1 0 0 40 ms 011 0 lt ms 1 1 1 23 0 1 420 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 Ilolo 40 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 40 ms 11 0 4 40 ms at 3 85 1
2. 2 Initial A Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E 8 Time msec 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 1 Bit 8 Bit No 7 0 0 10 1 1 1 1 7 Bit No 6 4 1 0 0 1 1 0 Time to dial after dial BtNo 5 1 1 tone on the line 6 Time msec 800 900 11111100 1200 1300 1400 1500 4 Bit No 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 7 o o 0 1 1 1 1 5 Bit No 6 1 010 1 1 0 Bit 5 011 W 1 0 1 0 1 4 Time msec 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 7211 0 Bit No 8 Bit No 7 o o o0 0 1 1 1 1 3 Bit No 6 4 1 0 0 1 1 1 CED duration time Bit No 5 7 within calling period 2 Time msec 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1 Bit No 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 7 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 6 1 1 010 1 1 Bit No 5 01110 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 4 The CED duration time level for automatic transmation 25 lt 197 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 29 SOFT SWITCH 29 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 0 magicolor 2590MF Time sec 5 Bit No Bit No Bit No 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4
3. 25 lt CO Of Of OF gt S O OF OF gt A OF Al OF OF gt oj CO gt ojoj Al 9 oj OF OF OF A Al OF OF OF Al oj CO Of CO OF OF 9 0 OF Of 9 OF OF OF Al oj oj OC O O OF 9 9 O 9 OF 9 OF OF OF gt gt A Al S oo oj CO CO Oj OF OF OF OF O O O o OF O OF OF OF OF OF Al SO O 0 oj oj Of CO OF A OF OF OF OF ojo O OF OF OF OF O 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF O Al OTN oj O OF OF OF OF OF O Oj OF OF OF OF Al gt A CO OJ Oj j Oj jp OF OF OF OF CO 9 OF OF OF OF OF A OF OF Al O 0 oO oj
4. Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 43 SOFT SWITCH 43 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 44 SOFT SWITCH 44 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 209 magicolor 2590MF lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 45 SOFT SWITCH 45 5 Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting g Bit HEX g 8 0 Reserved Reserved 7 0 6 Close network 0 1 5 0 4 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 46 SOFT SWITCH 46 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 0 No 8 Daylight savings timer 1 7 0 8 6 Reserved Reserved 5 5 0 RX one page then print one page PRINT RX 4 RX print mode 1 2 1 Start to print after receiving all pages MEMORY RX 9 0 Memory TX 3 Default TX mode 0 lt 1 ADF TX 0 Off 2 Header for FAX TX 1 1 On transmit header at top of each page Print model name 1 top of TX page If 0 name not r
5. 10 4 1 B W COPY Function Displays the number of monochrome copies made Use When checking the number of monochrome copies made 10 4 2 COLOR COPY Function Displays the number of color copies made Use When checking the number of color copies made 10 4 3 B W PRINT Function Displays the number of monochrome printed pages produced Use When checking the number of monochrome printed pages produced 10 4 4 COLOR PRINT Function Displays the number of color printed pages produced Use When checking the number of color printed pages produced 10 4 5 FAX PRINT Function Displays the total number of fax printed pages produced Use When checking the total number of fax printed pages produced 10 4 6 TOTAL SCAN Function Displays the number of scanner motions made during copying and scanning Use When checking the number of scanner motions made 10 5 RESULT Function Displays the transmission result information Use When checking the transmission result information 1 Press the Display key then the W key twice 2 Check that the TX RX RESULT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key Setting The TX RX RESULT screen appears so that the information can be checked procedure NOTE When the Start key is pressed details of the report displayed on the screen can be prin
6. fit Marketing area 2 Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovakia South Africa E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 112134 1516781112314 15 617 81112 314 5 617 81112 31415 6 7 8 39 10000000100000001 0000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 45 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 0001040 100040 140 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 170 Fiel
7. lt 81 7 Description of the control panel Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 Description of the control panel 741 Control panel display 7 1 1 Main screen magicolor 2590MF N x1 00 1 1 A4 EMPT 4139F3E506DA No Name Description 1 Document type Displays the type of the document currently set Zoom ratio Displays the zoom ratio currently set I Appears when 211 copying is set Icons that appear with copy operations 3 Appears when duplex 2 sided copying is set Appears when collated copying is set 4 Number of copies Displays the number of copies currently set to be made amp B Status Displays messages such as when media is empty 2 Displays messages such as when toner is low 6 Media tray media size Indicates the media tray and media size that is selected 7 density Displays the copy density currently set lt 7 1 2 Toner supply screen Pressing the Display key will display the TONER REMAINING screen Pressing the Cancel C key will cause the Main screen to reappear TONER REMAINING E P H Yo Me Ce Ke 4139F3E507DA 82 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 1 Menu mode function tree 8 Menu mode The press of the Menu Select key w
8. lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 31 SOFT SWITCH 31 ape E Initial Bit Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 32 SOFT SWITCH 32 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 E lt 200 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 33 SOFT SWITCH 33 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 7 V 17 Echo protection 0 off 1 tone V 29 Echo protection 4 6 0 tone 1 5 lenable CEQ in the 0 transmit path TCEQ 7 Yes 4 jenable CEQ in the 0 1 Yes receiver path RCEQ 0 2 Reserved Reserved Bit 4 5 V 17 V 29 and V 27 only 12 3 34 SOFT SWITCH 34 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 Reserved Reserved 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 Password capability in 0 No i 2 1 Reserved Reserved 0 201 magicolor 2590MF N lt 12 SOFT SWITCH
9. Level dBm 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No n o o o of o o o of o o o o o of Level dBm 41 to 50 Bit No 6 1 Setting disable 195 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 27 SOFT SWITCH 27 E m Initial Bit Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 Reserved Reserved 0 6 0 5 0 4 Level dBm 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 BitNo 4 POM 0 0 0 0 BitNo 3 11 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 BitNo 2 11 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Immunity for dial tone BtNo 1 1 1 0 receiver 2 Level dBm 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 BitNo 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BitNo 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 BitNo 2 0 O 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 4 Line input energy must be over this level before dialing T O lt 196 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 28 SOFT SWITCH 28
10. CO Of Of OF OF gt OF OF OF OF oj oj oj gt CO CO OF Al oj OF gt Al OF OF oj CO Of CO OF OF CO oj OF OF OF OF Al oj oj OC CO 9 9 9 OF 9 9 OF OF gt Al oo 9 O OF OF OF O O OF O OF OF OF OF OF 0 0 OF o Of Of gt OF Al Al OF OF 9 OF OF CO A O ojoj A OF OF CO O 9 Oj OF OF Al OF Al 0 0 oj 090 090 OF 9 OF OF CO 9 OF OF CO OF OF oj CO CO CO OF O OF OF CO 9 OF OF OF A O OF OF Oj OF 0 oj oj 9 Of OF 9 OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF A OF
11. 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 160 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set E Market area 5 Marketing area Hong Kong Hungary Ireland Israel Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 Soft Switch No S z magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 E lt CO Of Of Of OF
12. CO AIT oj 9 9 9 OF OF CO CO CO oj ojoj CO CO OF OF OF ojojoj Of OF S O S S S S CO o o o N oj CO oj 9 Oj CO O CO O O O OF CO OF O O O OF CO CO 0 0 ojojoj CO OF A A CO CO CO CO O CO CO O CO O OF CO OF OF 0 OJ O O O O O O O O O OF 0 0 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO Oj OF OF OF CO CO OF OF CO ALN oj 9 9 Oj 9 9 OF OF CO OF oj Oj CO 0 0 0 oj oj oj CO OF o OF CO OF 0 gt oj ojoj gt Of S OF OF CO OF 9 9 9 OF CO o o ojojoj N oj ojoj S CO OF CO OF CO CO OF CO CO 0 oj ojoj Of OF OF Of OF S S S o oo ooo oj CO Of o lo OF Of OF OF OF OF OF OF oj S Of CO OF
13. OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF Al Al O O Oj Oj OF Oj CO OF OF OF OF OF OF CO 090 090 OF OF OF A Oj OF OF OF A OF OF A OF OF OF OF 0 gt A ojoj 9 9 OF gt 9 OF OF O OF O O gt O 9 O O gt O O A O O N oO OF Oj OF OF OF CO OF oj A OF OF A Oj OF Al Al 0 oj oj CO O OF gt OF 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF AL oo Of CO CO CO OF OF OF OF OF Al ooo CO Of OF 9 9 OF 9 OF oj S CO CO Of ojoj CO OF gt OF 9 9 9 OF OF OF oj OF OF Al o o oj gt OF OF OF OF OF
14. Step Section Check Item Result Action Replace the paper with new 1 Is the paper damp YES paper that has just been Paper unwrapped Does the paper being used con 2 form to specifications NO Repl ce the paper Are there scratches or lines evi 3 Drum cartridge dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge face 4 Is the transfer belt dirty with fin YES Clean gerprints or oil Transfer belt unit Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 5 Is the transfer Belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer belt with a new transfer belt unit i i YES Clean 6 Fusing unit Is fusing entrance guide plate dirty NO Replace the fusing unit 277 magicolor 2590MF S 5 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 23 Back marking A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF ABCDE AA 40361406250 403615406300 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Is there a foreign object in the 1 Paper path paper path YES Remove the foreign object Is the fusing entrance guide plate 2 dirty or scratched YES Clean or replace Fusing unit i em 3 YES the fusing unit dirty 4 Is the transfer belt dirty with fin YES Clean gerprints or oil Transfer belt unit ict
15. No Section Part name Ref Page 5 1 Top cover 31 8 2 Rear cover P 34 3 Left cover P 32 4 Exterior parts Right cover P32 5 Paper feed cover P33 6 Front cover P33 7 Original glass unit 34 8 Operation board P35 9 Operation key board PST 10 USB board P 38 11 Image processing board P 39 12 Printer control board P 41 13 Boards and etc DC power supply1 P 42 8 14 DC power supply2 44 15 High voltage unit P 44 16 Waste toner near full detect board LED P 46 17 NCU board 7 18 LAN board 48 19 Scanner unit P 49 20 IR unit P50 21 unit 53 22 Paper feed unit P 58 23 Main motor P59 24 Power supply cooling fan motor P 60 25 Ventilation fan motor 63 26 Fusing motor P65 27 Developing motor P 66 28 Rack motor 67 29 Scanner motor P 68 30 IR cooling fan motor P 69 31 Other parts Tray1 paper pick up solenoid 70 32 Registration roller solenoid 70 33 Pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 71 34 Pressure retraction solenoid 2nd image transfer 35 Temperature humidity sensor 74 36 IDC sensor 75 37 Torque limiter 38 Inlet assy PT 39 Speaker P 80 30 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure LL z 5 3 1 Top cover E 1 Open the IR unit 2 Pull the lever and swing open the 8 upper cover 1 NOTE Use care not to touch the transfer belt 2 4139F2C515DA
16. D 0 5 Facsimile Information Field 3 1 z lt HEX 0 0 4 6 8 8 0 0 Data Bit 8 7 6 5 41 312111 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 241 23 22 21 20 19 18 19 32 31130 2928 27 26 25 Bit No 11 1 Bit 12 0 7200 bps Bit No 15 1 R8 x 7 7 Lines mm Fine Mode Bit No 19 0 Bit No 20 1 Unlimited Paper Length Hex Binary Conversion List Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 0 8 1 0 0 O 1 1 0 O 1 0 0 0 4 5 0 4 0 4 9 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 6 1 1 0 10 1 0 1 4 0 3 0 1 1 7 0 1 1 4 B 1 0 1 1 F 1 1 1 1 226 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Fax Protocols DIS DTC DCS Bit Allocation Table of FIF Facsimile Information Field Designation DIS DTC DCS 1 0 Invalid 1 Store and forward switching Internet fax simple mode 2 Set to 0 3 0 Invalid 1 Real time Internet fax Set to 0 Set to 0 0 Invalid 6 4 V 8 capabilities Invalid 0 256 octets preferred f Flame si
17. 28 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 Product Specifications General T 2 1 Product Specifications 25 gi sy lis Name Automatic Document Feeder lt Installation Inserted at upper rear side of main body Document alignment Center Document loading Face up B Functions Modes 1 Sided Mode C Paper Type of document 1 Sided mode Plain paper 60 g m to 128 g m 55 855 45 LegalS LetterS Detectable document size Width 140 to 216 mm Length 148 to 500 mm 500mm Fax Tx only Capacity 50 sheets 80 g m or load height of 8 mm or less D Paper feed prohibited originals The following types of originals should not be used Types of document Possible malfunctions Feed failure damage to the original or drive Original that is stapled or clipped failure due to clip clogging Pasted originals Misfeed broken original or folded paste up edges n Feed failure damage to the original or drive Book original failure ae 2 Original weighing less than 60 g m2 or Feed failure 129 g m2 or more Torn original Feed failure damaged sheet Highly curled original 15 mm or more Original misfeed due to dog ear or skew OHP transparencies Feed failure Label Sheet Feed failure Photographic paper gloss enamel paper or other gloss Feed failure damage to the original
18. i gt 4139F2C625DA 49 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 Field Service 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 20 IR unit 1 2 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See P 8 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual Remove the rear cover See 31 Remove the right cover See 32 Remove the left cover See 32 u 5 Remove eleven screws 1 discon nect the connector 2 and remove the image processing board protec tive cover 3 4139F2C660DA 6 Remove the screw 1 and harness holding bracket 2 4139F2C590DA 50 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F2C591DA 4139F2C673DA i 4139F2C588DA 5 Other 7 Disconnect two flat cables 1 and the connector 2 from the image pro cessing board 8 Remove three wire saddle 1 9 Disconnect two connectors MPJ1 and 2 from the image pro cessing board 10 Open the IR unit 11 Remove two screws 1 IR unit left cover 2 and IR unit right cover 3 NOTE Tounhook the tab insert your fin ger into the hole below the hinge and try to push the cover outward 51 magicolor 2590MF 7 2 i gt magicolor 2590MF 5 2 4139F2C587DA 4139F2C617DA 52 Field Ser
19. Reconnect 5 on Operation boad properly con E ected G 10 yes Change Operation boad Change IPB D E 252 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 16 3 Fusing heaters do not operate 16 Power supply errors Relevant Electrical Parts Safety switch SW2 DC power supply1 DCPU1 Fusing unit Location Step Check Item Electrical Result Action component Is the power source voltage being applied to 1 CN1DCPU1 DCPU1 J 6 NO Check wiring from power The top cover and front cover should in outlet to PG1 to CN1 closed position at this time s the power source voltage being applied to m YES Change the fusing unit CN2 on DCPU1 NO Change DCPU1 253 magicolor 2590MF D 2 5 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 171 How to identify problematic part This chapter is divided into two parts Initial Check Items and Troubleshooting Proce dure by a Particular Image Quality Problem When an image quality problem occurs first go through the Initial Check Items and if the cause is yet to be identified go to Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem magicolor 2590MF 17 1 1 Initial check items 1 Determine if the failure is attributable
20. lt Troubleshooting Appendix 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 9 5 3 10 5 3 11 5 3 12 5 3 13 5 3 14 5 3 15 5 3 16 5 3 17 5 3 18 5 3 19 5 3 20 5 3 21 5 3 22 5 3 23 5 3 24 5 3 25 5 3 26 5 3 27 5 3 28 5 3 29 5 3 30 5 3 31 5 3 32 5 3 33 5 3 34 5 3 35 5 3 36 5 3 37 5 3 38 5 3 39 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Paper feed COVGL 33 FROME COVEM 33 5220 u uuu unu usun 34 Operation board 35 Operation key board 37 USB board USB 38 Image processing board IPB a 39 Printer control board 41 DC power supply 1 42 DC power supply 2 0 44 High voltage unit FIV 44 Waste toner near full detect board LED WTDTB LED 46 NCU 47 LAN board 48 SCAMMON ERES 49 50 PH UN its an i a A 53 Paper feed 58 Mainimotor niei is irte ete HE n ei Rcs 59 Power supply cooling fan motor FM1 60 Ventilation fan motor 63 Fusingi motor L 65 Developing motor
21. OF OF OF oj CO OF Al 9 Of 167 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Marketing area 5 Ponippines FORE iiia Bit Bit No Bit No 5 112134 1516781112314 15 617 81112 314 5 617 81112 31415 6 7 8 39 100000001000000010000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 45 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 0001040 100040 140 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000
22. oj gt 9 174 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 Soft switch definition 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 1 SOFT SWITCH 01 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 Reserved Reserved 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 Byte 30 bytes 79753 15 bytes 60 bytes 1 V 34 Cl signal byte number number Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 175 magicolor 2590MF N lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 2 SOFT SWITCH 02 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX o E 8 Time between phase Rx 0 C to phase D signal in insensitivity 120 ms 180ms 60 ms V 17 Example Bit No 8 0 1 7 gt EOP Bit No 7 1 0 1 9 9 open to user 1 Yes Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 3 Percentage of error line 15 20 25 0 Transmit MCF signal level criteria Bit No 3 0 0 1 1 0 2 Bit 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 Send page and up to 3 times for that page 1 Sent N G page E 0 1 Not re send that N G p
23. OF OF gt oj oj gt OF oj OF gt OF OF OF gt A OC CO CO OF OF gt o 9 oj OF OF Al oj oj CO O OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF AJ S S OF CO OF CO S S 9 9 OF OF Al oj Al Al o OF OJ OF 9 OF OF OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF mA Aly OF OF 0 CO OF A OF OF gt A OF Al 0 OF OF A OF A OF Al CO Al CO OTN oj A CO OF OF OF OF OF 9 9 OF OF OF O OF OF OF OF OF O O Al 0 OJ Oj OF O oj CO OF OF OF OF OF Oj OF OF Al OF 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF oj 9 OF gt oj OF OF A OF A A oO Al O j OF OF OF Al Oj OF Oj Oj OF OF
24. 7 i 5 3 2 Rear cover 1 Open the IR unit 2 Disconnect the ADF hookup connector 3 Remove four screws 1 and the rear cover 2 s _ n 4139F2C610DA 31 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 3 Left cover 2 1 Open the IR unit 8 2 Remove the rear cover 5 See 31 8 3 Open the top cover 5 See 31 4 Remove four screws 11 5 Remove the tab 2 and the left cover 3 E 1 3 4139F2C611DA 5 5 3 4 Right cover gt 1 Open the IR unit 2 Remove the rear cover See P 31 3 Open the top cover See P 31 1 4 Remove four screws 1 5 Remove the tab 2 and the right cover 3 3 1 4139F2C631DA 32 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 5 Paper feed cover 7 Open the paper feed cover 2 2 Push in the right and left holders 1 and remove the paper feed cover 2 o N E amp 4139F2C612DA 5 3 6 Front cover 1 Open the IR unit 2 Open the top cover See P 31 g 3 Remove the right cover See P 32 5 4 Remove the left cover See 32 gt 5 Remove the paper feed cover See P 33 1 6 Remove four screws 1 and the front cover 2 NOTE When removing and reinstalling the front cover use care not to touch the developing roller of the toner cartridge 2 Or
25. 9 OF 9 OF OF OF oj oj 9 OF SA gt CO CO oO O OF Oj OF OF Oj OF oj OF OF A OF OF Al 0 oj oj CO Of O OF gt OF OF OF OF OF OF OF oo OF CO OF Al OF OF OF OF Al o oj 9 Of OF gt 9 OF 9 OF CO OF gt OF 9 OF oj OF OF oj o oj OF OF OF Al CO CO 0 173 magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Soft Switch No Marketing area Turkey Vietnam Bit No Bit No 4 4 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
26. o o oj 9 OF OF OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF 5 o OF OF OF CO OF A OF ALO OF OF A OF Al GO OF OF OF A OF Al CO Al oj OF Oj Oj 9 9 OF OF O OF OF OF Oj OF OF O Al Ay O Al CO Oj j O OF OF OF CO OF OF OF 9 O OF O OF 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF O O O O gt A O Al O O O O O O A O Al O O oj CO O OF OF OF AH O OF O O O O O O O O O O OF OF O CO oj oj CO O OF SA O OF O OF OF oo oj ojoj gt S CO OF oj 9 9 9 9 OF 9 OF Of OF OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF Of CO OF gt OF OF CO OF OF OF 9 o o 9 OF OF OF OF oj
27. 86 8 2 5 LAMP 86 8 2 6 BUZZER VOLUME 87 8 2 7 INITIAL MODE 8 2 8 TONER EMPTY STOP 87 8 2 9 TONER NEAR 4 4 1 0 000000000000 0 0 000000000 87 8 210 87 8211 CALIBRATION eet dice 88 82 12 REMOTE MONITOR iiit etit cene eere 88 8 3 PAPER SOURCE SETUP uyu 89 8 3 1 TRAY1 PAPER 8 3 2 TRAY2 PAPER 8 4 COPY SETTING eo 90 8 4 1 MODE 90 8 4 2 DENSITY LEVEL A 90 8 4 3 DENSITY LEVEL ce rere tpe eer eerte 90 8 4 4 90 8 4 5 QUALITY 8 4 6 PAPER PRIORITY ettet oia ra ereptus dea 91 85 FAX REGISTRATION tione tecnico tre reci ce tetra tese i 91 8 5 1 ONE TOUCH DIAL tipi ertet rette erbe E rn rece YR LEER ER 91 8 5 2 SPEED DIAL PR 91 8 5 3 GROUP DIA u 91 8 67 TCSETTING ms 92 8 6 1 SCAN DENSITY 8 6 2 RESOLUTION 92 magicolor 2590MF Maintenance 25 lt Tro
28. Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX FSK delay time 1 30 sec 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 216 Bit 8 This is the delay time for PSK signal after sending MCF or PPR command The timer depends on each country regulation Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 59 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 1 gt Initial 5 Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E 8 0 Reserved Reserved Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 00 30 01 00 01 30 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 5 Time between Greenwich mean time T 0 mean time 02 00 02 30 03 00 03 30 Bit No 6 0 0 0 0 Bit No 5 0 0 0 0 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 Bit No 3 1 1 4 1 4 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 Time Between GMT Bit No 6 0 0 i i 8 Greenwich Mean Bit No 5 0 0 0 0 3 Time Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 0 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 0 2 Bit No 6 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 5 0 0 0 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Time bet
29. eee 280 184 Emor HE SERERE ERE RE 281 18 4 1 Reception 281 18 4 2 Transmission sie Su 283 Appendix 19 Parts layout drawing onn ntt tinent ets 287 19 1 root trn aio ir er PEE IPS E 287 19 2 Auto Document Feeder Unit nennen 289 19 3 Duplex Option 290 19 4 Lower Feeder Unit Option 291 20 Connector layout drawing seen 292 Xii Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 System configuration General 1 System configuration Machine front view 3 5 2 SSS h Ss 1 0 4 2 3 J 4139 2 562 1 magicolor 2590MF 3 Lower feeder unit 2 Duplex option 4 Dust cover Standard for U S A and Europe us z e o tO 9 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Product specifications A Type Type Desktop Printing system Semiconductor laser and electrostatic image transfer to plain paper Exposure system 2 laser diodes and polygon mirror PC drum type OPC organic photo conductor Blade cleaning system cleaning Scan resolution 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 300 dpi Prin
30. 1 4139F2C556DA 33 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 7 Original glass unit u 1 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See P 8 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual 2 Open the IR unit NOTE Ifthe IR unit is to be opened with the Auto Document Feeder Unit removed do that while pushing the portion 1 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C626DA 4139F2C613DA 3 Remove the three caps 1 5 2 Remove three screws 1 Disconnect two connectors 2 and remove the ground wire 3 Then remove the control panel 4 2 3 5 4139F2C663DA 34 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 6 Open the IR unit 7 Remove two screws 1 IR unit left cover 2 and IR unit right cover 3 NOTE To unhook the tab insert your fin ger into the hole below the hinge and try to push the cover outward magicolor 2590MF 8 Remove six screws 1 and the origi nal glass unit 2 7 i s 1 4139F2C614DA 5 3 8 Operation board OPB 1 Open the IR unit 1 2 Remove the three caps 1 4139F2C613DA 35 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 4139F2C663DA 3 3 pl 2 4 4139F2C664DA 36 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Remove three s
31. OF GO Of Of CO CO O O O O Al O O O O O O OF CO CO CO CO CO 0 oj oj O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O CO CO O O O O OF OF Al Oj O O O O Al O O CO O 0 CO 0 oj oj oj Oj OF Oj ojojoj oj ojoj S OF CO CO Of CO CO OF OF CO CO CO o oj ojoj CO CO OF CO Of Of CO CO OF OF CO OF oj ojoj O CO CO OF OF OF CO OF OF OF CO OF 090 Of Of CO OF OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Of CO OF A CO CO S CO Of Of OJ CO CO CO OF oj gt Of CO oj 9 Of ojojoj S CO OF GO OF OF gt ojojoj Of Of GO OJ o o o o N oO CO CO OF O CO CO CO O O CO CO OF OF O OF CO 0 W oj ojoj Of CO OF OF A
32. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean 2 PHunit Is the window surface dirty YES Clean 3 sensor Is the sensor dirty YES Clean Replace the toner cartridge 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the PH unit after performing step 3 Replace the IDC sensor Replace the hight voltage unit D f 268 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 14 Foggy background A Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 403616403000 magicolor 2590MF B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the toner cartridge face 2 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean Is the connector or contact termi 3 nal of the drum cartridge con NO nected properly Clean the contact terminal or reconnect the connector Is the developing bias contact ter NO Clean the contact terminal or 4 Toner cantndge minal in good contact check the terminal position Is the connector or contact termi Clean the contact terminal or 5 nal of the PH unit connected NO tacorin ctithe connactor PH unit properly 6 Is the window surface dirty YES Clean 7
33. oj A OF Oj 9 Oj j Oj 9 9 OF OF O OF OF Al O O 0 OF o OF CO 9 9 OF OF OF OF OF 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF oj 9 OF gt Of 9 OF 9 9 OF Oj gt A gt CO CO N OF OF OF OF OF AH O OF O Oj O O O O O O O O OF O CO oj oj CO O CO O SA OF OF o o ojo o OF AL S oo S ojoj gt O S O OF O CO O O SO 9 9 9 OF 9 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OJ o CO OF gt OF OF OF 9 OF o o o oj OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF oj CO OF A OF 9 OF 90 OF OF 169 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007
34. MODE1 MODE2 86 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 2 6 BUZZER VOLUME Function To set the volume of alarms and the beep sounded when a key is pressed se Setting The default setting is LOW procedure HIGH Low OFF 8 2 7 INITIAL MODE Function set the mode Copy mode or Fax mode that the machine starts up in or returns to Use after the Control Panel is reset Setting The default setting is COPY procedure COPY FAX 8 2 8 TONER EMPTY STOP Function Specifies whether to stop or continue printing when a toner empty condition is detected Use To permit printing upon a toner empty condition The default setting is ON Setting ON ON FAX OFF procedure ON If ON is selected printing copying and faxing stop when the toner runs out ON FAX If ON FAX is selected only faxing stops when the toner runs out OFF If OFF is selected printing copying and faxing do not stop when the toner runs out 8 2 9 TONER NEAR EMPTY Function To set whether to display a message when a toner near empty state is detected Use Use this setting to display a message when a toner near empty state is detected Setting The default setting is OFF procedure ON OFF 8 2 10 AUTO CONTINUE Enables or disables printing when the size of the media loaded in the tray does not Function z m
35. a Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Periodical check Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 1 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts Duplex Option Periodically replaced parts are not employed 7 2 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 8 31 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked screws To prevent loose screws a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened B Red painted screws NOTE The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake Do not remove or loosen any of the red painted screws in the field It should also be noted that when two or more screws are used for a single part only one repre sentative screw may be marked with the red paint C Variable resistors on board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given Adjustment Setting 5 2 D Removal of PWBs N CAUT
36. 245 15 4 7 12H Laser malfunction eee enne nnns 245 15 4 8 14h 2nd image transfer pressure retraction failure 246 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 4 9 15H Cleaning blade pressure retraction 247 15 4 10 16H Transfer belt rotation failure 247 5 15 4 11 17H Rack rotation failure a 248 a 15 4 12 18H Heating roller warm up failure 248 8 15 4 13 19H Abnormally low heating roller temperature 248 15 4 14 Abnormally high heating roller temperature 248 15 4 15 1 Faulty thermistor 248 15 4 16 21H Faulty OHP 249 15 4 17 23H Faulty waste toner near full detection 249 15 4 18 IR cooling fan motor malfunction 250 15 4 19 101H Scanner motor malfunction 250 15 4 20 102H Faulty IR exposure lamp 15 4 21 ENGINE INTERFACE Communication error between engine controller 251 15 4 22 CONTROLLER Controller internal error 16
37. 3 3 3 AD drive board ADDB u eterne neret 3 3 4 Coolingifan motor 3 3 5 Transportiyot or M 2 3 3 6 Reverse motor M2 3 3 7 Registration Solenoid SD1 seen 34 Cleaning procedure m nee Fia E HER HL eR eh 3 4 1 Miu Troubleshooting 4 Jam display 15 4 1 List of display 15 4 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 15 4 2 kn ERR Rie ris RR 16 o 1 17 4 3 1 Initial Check items oin ee 17 4 3 2 Misfeed at duplex option reverse drive storage section 17 4 3 3 Misfeed at duplex option paper feed 18 5 Error 19 51 2 19 5 1 1 Trouble code list iii p 19 Duplex Option Maintenance Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 2 How to reset 5 5 3 SOUNO ae ane IR TREE 2 5 3 1 OFH Duplex cooling fan motor malfunction 19 5 6 Misce
38. 8 16 1 Machine is not energized at all PU operation check 252 5 16 2 Control panel indicators do not light 252 E 16 3 Fusing heaters do not operate a 253 17 Miscellaneous ettet tienne 254 17 1 How to identify problematic 254 3 1743 1 check items 1 neret 254 17 1 2 check items 2 nnne 255 2 17 2 6 1 M 256 17 2 1 Scanner system Blank copy or black 256 17 2 2 Scanner system Low image density or rough image 257 5 17 2 8 Scanner system Foggy background sse 258 17 2 4 Scanner system Black streaks or bandS 259 17 2 5 Scanner system Black spots 260 17 2 6 Scanner system White streaks bands 261 E 17 2 7 Scanner system Uneven 262 E 17 2 8 White lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines FD z and colored bands 263 17 2 9 White lines CD white bands in CD colored lines CD and colored bands in CD
39. f the width of E in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Decrease the setting f the width of E in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width TM Increase the setting 17 Auto Document Feeder Unit 25 lt Auto Document Feeder Unit T O _ lt 5 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 2 2 ADF MAIN REGIST To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by Function varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder When the original glass is replaced When a new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjust the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern1 so that the fol lowing specification is met 0x2 0mm Adjustment Specification B A 4139F3C546DA Adjustment 5 0 5 0 mm 0 0 0 0 mm 5 0 5 0 mm Range Step 0 5 mm 1 Print the test pattern See P 131 of the main unit service manual 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select ADF MAIN REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place
40. 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 19 Remove two screws 1 and remove the holder 2 magicolor 2590MF 20 Remove two screws 1 and remove the fusing unit 2 21 To reinstall reverse the order of removal N CAUTION Make sure that the docking gear shaft of the fusing unit fits in the hole of the fusing frame When reinstalling the left cover after reinstalling the fusing unit make sure that the harness of the fusing unit is located below the rib of the left cover See P 111 5 2 1 4139F2C531DA 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Firmware upgrade 4 Firmware upgrade LL 41 Controller firmware upgrading S N 4 1 1 Preparations for firmware upgrading 5 Make sure that the scanner driver has been installed in the PC Before updating the firmware print Configuration Page to confirm the current Controller Firmware Version See P 116 4 1 2 Upgrading procedure 1 Connect the machine and PC using the USB cable 2 Turn ON the machine s main switch pressing Menu Select key 3 Confirm that BIOS MODE appears on the screen BIOS MODE 5 7 2 4139F2E652DA Copy the firmware data and upgrading program in any arbitrary directory of the PC Double click Update exe Click Browse and select File path mc2590MFVXXXFaxF01p bin
41. 5 4 Remove four screws 1 and the DC power supply 2 2 2 4139F2C596DA 5 3 15 High voltage unit HV 1 Remove the DC power supply 2 See 44 2 Remove the screw 1 and the bracket 2 4139F2C545DA 44 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 3 Remove four screws 1 magicolor 2590MF 1 4139F2C561DA 4 Disconnect two connectors 1 and remove the high voltage unit 2 7 i 4139F2C546DA 4 Precautions for reinstallation of the high voltage unit Make sure that the high voltage unit fits into the tab 1 at the location 4 shown the left During the reinstallation proce dure make sure that the high volt age terminal is not deformed or left loose 4139F2C547DA 45 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 5 3 16 1 Remove the high voltage unit See 44 4139F2C597DA 2 4139F2C598DA 46 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Waste toner near full detect board LED WTDTB LED 2 Remove the screw 1 unhook the tab 2 and remove the wiring saddle 3 Then remove the shield 4 NOTE When reinstalling the shield use care not to allow the harness to be wedged in it 3 Remove three tabs 1 and the waste toner near full detect board LED 2 4 Di
42. O OF OF Al CO oj oj CO O OF gt O O OF O O O OF O O gt O Of CO CO OF OF O o OF OF OF OF OF o ojo oj oj Of CO OF gt OF 9 OF OF 9 OF oj S OF 9 Of Of CO OF gt OF 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF A o oj O OF gt OF 0 OF OF oj A Al Al CO Al 157 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Marketing area 2 China Czech Denmark Europe E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 11213415167 8111231415 617 81112 314 516 7181112 31415 6 7 8 39 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 E 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 45
43. Failure to Train MCF Message Confirmation 1 650 Hz or 1 850 Hz MPS Multi Page Signal NCS Non Standard Facilities Command NCF Non Standard Facilities NSS Non Standard Facilities Set up PIN Procedural Interrupt Negative PIP Procedural Interrupt Positive PRI EOM Procedure Interrupt End of Message COM PRI MPS Procedure Interrupt Multi page Signal MPS Procedure Interrupt End of Procedure EOP RTN Retrain Negative RTP Retrain Positive TSI Transmitting Station Identification 13 Fax Protocols 225 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 13 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 4 How to analyze the T30 protocol monitor Example V 17 Communication 5 DCS or DIS HEX Data as printed on page 5 See P 144 8 PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE APR 23 04 12 20 SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT ABC 0001 TX 01 22345678901234567890 DEC 02 15 00 008 00 00 005 12 OK TX RX DATA FF 13 83 00 46 88 00 FIF Facsimile Information Field FCF Facsimile Control Field 83 DCS 80 DIS Means Last Control Field Means address
44. lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 13 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 us Designation DIS DTC DCS 97 0 Invalid 1 Color mono color multi value 300 pixels x 300 pixels 400 pixels x 400 pixels 25 4 mm 98 0 Invalid 1 x 3 85 lines mm and or 100 pixels x 100 pixels 25 4 mm for color mono color multi value 99 0 Invalid 17 Single phase C negotiation capacity 100 Set to 0 101 Set to 0 102 Set to 0 103 Set to 0 0 Without 104 Extend field With 232 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Troubleshooting 14 Jam display 14 1 Misfeed display When a media misfeed occurs the printer shows the corresponding media misfeed sta tus by means of the Error indicator on the control panel or LCD display 14 Jam display LI i CAUTION Error PAPER MISFEED CAUTION OPEN FRONT COVER 1 4139F4E510DA Display Misfeed Location Misfeed processing Action location CAUTION PAPER MISFEED Top cover top front 8 Paper feed section 2 19 P235 CAUTION OPEN FRONT COVER CAUTION Transfer section Top cover P 236 PAPER JAM Fusing section Top cover 237 CAUTION Exit section Top cover P 238 OPEN FRON
45. 1 Enter the user service mode and call 3 RESET COUNT to the screen 9 2 Select FUSER UNIT and press the Menu Select key procedure 3 Press the Menu Select key 111 9 User service mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 4 3 TRANSFER ROLLER Resets the counter value of the transfer roller Function Executes the image stabilization sequence Use To reset the transfer roller counter after the transfer roller is replaced Enter the user service mode and call 3 RESET COUNT to the screen Select TRANSFER ROLLER and press the Menu Select key Press the Menu Select key Turn OFF the machine s main switch When the machine s main switch is turned ON the image stabilization is automatically executed magicolor 2590MF Setting procedure 9 5 MOVE TO HOME Function Moves the scanner unit to its home position for locking Use When transporting the machine Enter the user service mode Select CCD MOVE TO HOME and press the Menu Select key The scanner unit moves to the home position when the start key is pressed Turn OFF the machine s main switch Open the IR unit Then inserting a pin or similar object into the hole at portion 1 lower the lock lever 2 OU N 1 2 Setting procedure T O lt 4139F3C525DA NOTE
46. 3 4 3 Registration roll rs irn ier ea rr Troubleshooting Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section 5 SERVICE MODE tet 51 SERVICE MODE entry procedure 16 5 2 ADJUST 5 2 1 ADF SUB ZOOM 5 2 2 ADF MAIN REGIST a 18 5 2 3 ADF SUB REGIST eta 19 Auto Document Feeder Unit 2 lt Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 6 Mechanical adjustment 5 rrr 20 6 1 Leading edge skew adjustment 20 Troubleshooting T Jam display D M 23 71 Misfeed display nonet 23 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 23 7 0 SensorlayOUl uices ite rette casta e E tae a ce 24 7 3 E n 25 7 3 1 Initial CHECK items 25 7 3 2 Misfeed at the document feeding section 26 7 3 3 Misfeed at the document transport Section 27 7 3 4 Misfeed at the document exit
47. OJ 9 OF O OF CO Oj ojoj 9 ojojoj Al 0 oj oj 9 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF oj gt A CO Al 9 9 OF oj A gt CO CO OF OJ O O OF OF AH O O O O O O O O O O O OF OF O O oj oj CO O O A O oj OF AL Of CO CO CO CO OF OF OF OF OF OJ 9 OF OF OJ OF oj oj OF gt OF OF 9 OF OF OF Al CO CO Of Of 0 CO OF 9 9 9 9 OF 9 OF 9 OF oj OF CO OF oj OF OF Al 9 OF 9 OF OF OF 155 magicolor 2590MF E lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Mark
48. WTDTB LED 5 PRCB D 2 5 249 15 Error codes Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 4 18 31H IR cooling fan motor malfunction 5 E Relevant Electrical Parts IR cooling fan motor FM3 DC power supply1 DCPU1 g Printer control board PRCB DC power supply2 DCPU2 8 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 1 Check the connector for proper con A _ nection and correct as necessary Check for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary IPB 1 ON IPB MPJ1IPB 3 LOCK Change PRCB Change DCPU2 Change DCPU1 4 FM3 operation check 15 419 101H Scanner motor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner motor M5 DC power supply1 DCPU1 Printer control board PRCB DC power supply2 DCPU2 WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i i p Control Signal Location Electrical component Check to see if the lock lever of the Scan 1 ner unit is unlocked and unlock the lock lever if it is locked 2 Check the M5 connector for proper con _ u nection and correct as necessary e 2 3 Check M5 for proper drive coupling and _ 9 co
49. u 109 9 2 7 CED LEVEE LL nito APERA aa AE 109 9 2 8 MODE etie te i E 109 9 2 9 CODING SCHEME 109 9 2 10 TONER EMPTY REPORT 110 9 2 11 PROTOCOL REPORT 2110 9 3 111 9 3 1 TRANSFER BELT ele 111 9 3 2 EUSERUNIFE LZ sicsaceracedasharpacneazaee 111 9 3 3 TRANSFER ROLLER eror rice te re e POE ECHTE LA EFE 111 94 HRESETOQOUNT 2 coe o 111 9 4 1 TIANSEEBBELT luna ee eee En ee e DE REI 111 9 4 2 FUSER UNIT 225 u a R uu SQ 111 9 4 3 TRANSFER ROLLER 112 9 5 CCDNMOVETOHOMB 112 10 Display mode E 10 1 Display function tree erento rnnt 113 10 2 TONER REMAINING ct ecce ia cp te 113 10 3 PRINT STATUS Eee i ener in ree i eed 113 10 4 TOTAL PAGE cecinit nete 114 10 4 1 BAN COPY 114 10 4 2 COLOR 114 magicolor 2590MF Maintenance 25 lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1043 BIW PRINT 114 COLOR PRINT Seu eae ee 114 amp 1045 FA
50. 2007 08 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 CONTENTS Auto Document Feeder Unit Auto Document Feeder Unit General 1 Product SpecificaliOrs Maintenance 2 Periodic Check 2 1 Maintenance procedure Periodic parts check 2 1 1 Separator PAC EH 3 Others 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items seen 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts 5 8 3 2 2 Cleaning parts 1 5 3 3 Disassembly Assembly S 3 3 1 Paper feed 3 3 2 PICK UP roller reote t teh 3 3 3 Auto Document Feeder u uuu uuu 3 3 4 eyes Dau LS uum 5 9 3 5b 3 3 6 Document feeder tray E 5 3 3 7 DF control board 5 3 3 8 Main motor 3 4 Cleaning procedure 3 4 1 Paper feed roller eni tnit endroit assqa 3 4 2
51. 220 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 64 SOFT SWITCH 62 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 65 SOFT SWITCH 63 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX key definition in 1 is external key machine PBX default is internal i PBX mode 0 is internal key machine PSTN default is external 7 0 8 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 2 0 0 image 1 No Bit 8 If this bit set to 1 the key is use to access PSTN line after dial the pre fix number If this bit set to 0 the key is use to access PBX line instead of PSTN line Bit 1 This bit set to 1 the first page image will not append at the bottom of error report or OK report 221 magicolor 2590MF S 72 lt magicolor 2590MF e 5 9 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 66 SOFT SWITCH 64 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 Reserved Reserved 7 0 6 In RX side if no any 0 0 FAX signal detected 1 Yes Selectable by User 1 Yes 4 0 3 0 Reserved Reserved 0
52. 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 oj ojoj CO CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A oO CO CO 9 O O CO CO CO O OF CO CO OF OF OF Hl O CO CO CO CO N oj ojoj CO CO 9 OF 9 OJ GO OF 9 oj oj Of gt OF ojojoj O O O OF O O O gt O O O O gt O OF Of CO GO OF CO CO O O O O Al O O CO O OF O O OF CO CO 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 9 9 O O OF O O O Al O O O O OF Al O O CO CO CO O oj oj 9 OF CO O 0 0 oj ojoj CO CO CO CO OF OF S CO CO o oj ojoj CO OF Of Of CO OF OF OF OF CO oj ojoj O CO CO OF O OF OF CO OF OF OF A S o OF oj CO Of OF S OF OF OF Of CO OF OF OJ OF OF OF OF OF oj CO Of A CO oj CO Of CO
53. OF OF OF gt A Al o oj oj O OF OF OF OF Al CO 9 Oj OF OF Al OF OF O OF OF OF OF ml ml ml o S CO OF OJ Of OF OF gt ALO 9 OF OF OF A Al o oj 9 OF O OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF A CO o OF OF OF CO OF A OF ALO OF OF Al CO OF OF OF OF A OF Al CO Al So o oj CO OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Oj O O O OF Oj OF CO OF OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF 0 oj oj 9 9 9 OF OF A 9 OF OF 9 OF 9 oj gt oj Al OF OF OF A A A OO S CO oO o OF O OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF O Al CO oj oj CO O OF gt O O OF O O O OF O O gt O Of CO CO OF O o OF OF OF OF OF
54. 2 Is the outside dirty YES Clean Is the transfer belt dirty with fin 3 YES Clean gerprints or oil Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 4 Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer Transfer belt unit belt with a new transfer belt unit 5 YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller scratched 6 15 the ground terminal connected NO Correct properly 7 there a foreign object ho YES Remove the foreign object paper path Paper path ENS 8 s the fusing entrance guide plate YES Clean or replace dirty or scratched 9 j enero nas psen eliminated NO the toner cartridge after performing step 8 S 5 271 magicolor 2590MF D 5 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 17 Colored spots A Typical faulty images Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Colored spots 40361640520 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Drum cartridge Are the spots in a single color NO Replace the drum cartridge Are there scratches or lines evi after performing step 7 2 dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge face 3 Is the transfer belt dirty with fin
55. o ojo oj oj OF gt OF OF 9 oj o o Of CO OF gt OF 9 9 OF gt OF 9 OF OF OF Al o oj OF gt A OF 0 OF OF A Al CO Al CO A 159 magicolor 2590MF lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Marketing area 2 Finland France Germany Greece E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 11213415167 8111231415 617 81112 314 5 617 81112 3415 6 7 8 39 100000001000000010000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 45 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 0001040 100040 140 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50
56. r Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Bit If set 1 machine will become manual RX mode if available memory size less than 128 K 12 3 15 SOFT SWITCH 15 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 0 Close the IPSEL1 port 8 IPSEL1 0 1 Active the IPSEL1 port 0 Close the DCSEL 7 DCSEL 0 1 Active the DCSEL port 0 0 Close the DCLIM port 6 DCLIM 0 1 Active the DCLIM port 5 0 4 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 B 2 0 1 0 187 magicolor 2590MF N lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 16 SOFT SWITCH 16 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 5 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 Reserved Reserved 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 i 1 MMR MR 3 Fax communication method coding method Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 1 12 3 17 SOFT SWITCH 17 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 Reserved Reserved 7 0 6 CED frequenc 0 2 1 1100 Hz 0 E 5 0 Time T T 100 ms T 200 ms T 300 ms Bit No 5 0 0 0 4 Bit No 4 0 1 1 0 Pause between off Bit No 3 1 0 1 hook and CED
57. 40361540230 403615402400 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original z Shading Shading sheet is dirty YES Clean sheet 3 Mors ons Mirrors lens and or original glass are dirty YES Clean Original glass Clean 4 Scanner unit Exposure lamp is dirty YES Change scanner unit PWBs and Connectors are securely connected with no Reconnect 5 connection bent pins and no breaks in the connection NO Replace the connection cables cables cable 6 Connectors on the image processing board NO Reconnect Image pro are connected properly 7 cessing board The problem has been eliminated after per Change image processing forming step 6 board 259 magicolor 2590MF D 2 Q 5 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 5 Scanner system Black spots A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 40361640290 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original glass Original glass is dirty YES Clean The problem has been eliminated after NO Change scanner unit performing step 2 D f 260 Fie
58. Check Item Action Does the media meet product specifications Change the media Is the media curled wavy or damp Change the media Instruct the user in correct media storage 15 a foreign object present along the media path or is the media path deformed or worn Clean or change the media path Are the paper separator fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective paper separa tor finger Are the rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operational Correct or change the defective actuator 14 3 2 A Detection timing Misfeed at paper feed section Type Description Detection of mis feed at paper feed section The leading edge of the paper does not block the registration sensor PS1 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the tray1 paper pick up solenoid SD1 has been energized B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration sensor PS1 Tray1 paper pick up solenoid SD1 Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Aton Control Signal ical 1 Initial check items 2 Check the PRCB connector for proper con m E nection and correct as necessary 3 51 sensor check PRCB PJ1
59. OF OF OF OF CO CO Oj CO Oj CO O CO CO CO CO CO OF OF CO OF OF OF O OF O Oj O 0 CO CO O CO OF CO CO OF O CO CO 0 9 9 90 OF Oj 9 O CO Oj OF oj CO 0 0 oO oj CO CO Oj OF Oj OF OF 0 0 gt oj ojoj CO CO CO Of CO OF OF S CO CO o o N oj ojoj CO O CO CO OF Of CO CO o oj ojoj O CO CO OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF 9 CO OJ OF OF S CO Of CO Of CO CO OF Of Of CO OJ OF OF OF o OF S CO Of CO OJ oj CO CO Of CO OF CO OJ CO oj gt Of CO 164 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set G Market area 7 Marketing area Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Bit No Bit No Bit No 4
60. OF OF 0 ojoj 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF gt OF 9 OF OF OF OF A A oO OF O OF Oj OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF oj OF OF 0 oj oj CO O OF gt OF 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF AL oo OF CO CO OF OF OF OF OF OF Al o ojo oj oj 9 OF 9 9 9 OF 9 9 o ojoj CO OF gt OF 9 oj A OF OF OF OF Al Al o oj gt OF OF OF OF Al CO CO Of OF CO OF A OF OF OF OF oj A oj oj gt CO CO OF 9 OF OF OF gt A Al 9 oj OF OF CO Al Of CO OF OF Al o OF OF oj
61. Semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW Maximum average radiation power 7 5 Wavelength 775 800 nm Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM Therefore the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances 4139 506 5 12 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS the U S A Canada CDRH Regulation This machine is certified as a Class Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan dard according to the Food Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990 Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration of the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation The label shown to page S 16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States N CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those spec ified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10mw Wavelength 7
62. VER 136 11 6 39 gt me 136 11 64 MAIN SIZE innen tant rti tide 136 11 6 5 SERIAL 136 11 6 6 BB CPLD VER 136 11 6 7 NAND CODE VER 136 FONCTION 137 14 73 PAPER FEED TEST 22 ciis idc 137 17 7 2 PRINT TEST PATIERN tt ebria enint 137 11 7 3 ADF FEED TEST 138 11 7 4 COPY ADF GLASS AREA 138 11 75 CCDMOVE TO HOME cett ada eds 138 11 7 6 FAX RES COPY tnnt teen 139 114 TEST iiid Proc re nda eia sak 139 11 8 SOFT SWITCH c rnc t ba erect 140 11 8 1 KEY DEFINITION FOR SOFT SWITCH essen 140 11 9 REPORT magicolor 2590MF Maintenance 25 lt Troubleshooting Appendix magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt Troubleshooting Appendix viii Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 9 1 SERVICE DATA LIST 1i caccia 140 11 9 2 ERROR CODE 5 143 11 9 8 JL30PROTOGCOL LIST itte harina terna Ecos Sox epe nn Pa 144 11 10 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE 146 11 11 Em 146 11332 GLEAR DATA rte ce etie sat tete ee tacite arae tz etes 147 11 12 11 SRAM CLEAR
63. 2 Check the PRCB connector for proper con _ nection and correct as necessary 3 PS7 sensor check PRCB PJ6PRCB 3 ON C 7 4 511 sensor check PRCB PJ9PRCB 14 ON 4 to 5 5 1502 operation check PRCB PJ11PRCB 4 REM J to K 1 6 PRCB D f 238 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 14 Jam display 14 3 6 Undefined misfeed A Detection timing 5 Description Detection of 4 undefined mistead Conflicting settings are made in the printer driver o E B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Image processing board IPB Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical component 1 Check printer driver settings Control Signal Check the IPB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 4 Change IPB 5 PRCB D 2 5 239 magicolor 2590MF D a 15 Error codes 15 Error codes 151 Trouble display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 The CPU performs a self diagnosis on the condition of the unit and if a malfunction is detected the warning appears alternately with the e
64. CO O O O O O O O CO CO 0 9 9 90 OF Oj 9 O CO Oj OF oj CO 0 0 oO oj CO CO Oj OF Oj OF OF 0 0 gt oj ojoj CO CO CO Of Of OF OF OF CO S CO CO o o N oj ojoj CO CO OF OF CO Of CO CO OF CO o CO o oj ojoj gt O CO CO OF OF oj OF 9 OF OF OF S CO OJ OF OF oj CO Of OF CO CO CO OF OF o oj CO Of CO gt Of CO CO oj CO Of CO CO CO CO CO OJ CO GO oj gt Of 9 162 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set F Market area 6 Marketing area Italy Japan Korea Malaysia Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 Soft Switch No CO CO CO OF OF OF OF A Al Oj O O OF OF O O OF OF OF Al OF OF O O 0 magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
65. Message check Received without error 4139F3C555DA 223 13 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 2 Line control at MPS TX 5 13 2 1 Procedure of G3 mode communication wo Basic communications diagram of G3 mode This machine G3 machine Transmission Receiving CNG Phase START key press CED Aside start A DIS CSI a TCF TSI DCS B at EOM TX at EOM RX at MPS TX EOP or MPS or EOM at MPS RX D DCN i E G3 machine This machine Transmission Receiving 5 CNG Phase START key press R side start 5 NSF DIS CSI EE a at EOM TX 1 at EOM RX f MCF at MPS RX D E Drawing Line Control 4139F3C556DA 224 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 3 Table of reference code Code Function CFR Confirmation to Receive 1850 Hz or 1650 Hz 3 sec CIG Calling Station Identification CRP Command Repeat CSI Called Subscriber Identification DCN Disconnect DCS Digital Identification Signal DIS Digital Transmit Command DTC Digital Transmit Command EOM End of Message 1 100 Hz EOP End of Procedure
66. OF OF OF OF OF Al OF Al CO 0 OLN oj 09 090 9 OF OF 9 9 9 OF OF Oj OF OF OF oj Oj CO CO O OF OF Oj OF OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF Oj Alo OF 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF oj oj oj 9 OF OF OF OF A A oO CO o oO OF OF OF Al OF 9 OF OF OF O OF A Al 0 oj oj CO O OF gt OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF oo CO 0 OF OF OF OF OF Al CO OF oj oj 9 OF 9 9 OF 9 9 o ojoj CO OF gt OF 9 oj OF oj OF OF Al Al oj 9 9 OF OF A OF gt Al CO Al 9 gt
67. OF OF Al CO oj oj CO CO OF A OF OF OF OF OF oo Of CO CO OF OF CO OF OF OF OF ojo oj oj Of CO OF gt OF OF OF 9 OF oj CO Of CO OF gt OF 9 9 OF OF 9 OF oj OF OF Al o oj 9 gt OF OF gt A Al CO Al CO A 165 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Marketing area 2 Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 1 2 314 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81112 314 5 617 81112 31415 6 7 8 39 100000001000000010000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000
68. OF Al 9 OF OF 161 magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Soft Switch No Marketing area Hong Kong Hungary Ireland Israe Bit No Bit No Bit No m z 4 4 4 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 oj ojoj CO CO oO CO CO Oj O CO CO CO O CO OF CO OF OF OF OF Al O CO CO CO CO N oj ojoj CO CO CO CO Of 9 ojoj Of gt oj ojojoj O O 9 o ojojoj O gt GO CO Of OF OF O CO CO O O O O Al Oj O CO O OF O O o CO CO CO CO 0 oj OJ O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 9 O O O O O O
69. Of OF OF gt ALO OF OF Al Al un O OF OF OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al CO o OF OF OF OF A OF ALO OF OF A Al OF OF OF OF A OF Al CO Al oj CO O 9 Oj 9 9 Oj OF OF O OF OF OF O O Al O Al CO 9 OF CO oj CO Oj Oj OF OF 9 ojoj 0 j oj oj 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF CO gt A CO Al 9 9 OF oj A A OO Al CO OC O OF OF OF AH O OF O O O O O O O O O O OF O O CO oj oj S O OG O O OF Of OF AL S oj ojoj gt SO OF oj 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF Of OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Of OF gt OF OF OF OF OF oj CO CO Of oj CO OF 9 9 OF OF OF
70. gt OF OF 9 OF oj CO 9 o o oj CO OF OF OF OF 0 A oj OF OF oj ojoj 9 9 OF OF o OF OF CO OF A OF Al OF 9 oj A A oj oj gt CO CO oj OF OF oj gt A OF Al oj OF OF CO Al Of CO OF OF ALO OF OF OF OF Al oj oj O OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF ml ml ml o S S OF OJ Of gt ALO OF OF OF Al Al an o oj OF OF O OF CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al 5 o OF OF OF CO OF A OF ALO 9 OF gt A Al OF OF OF A OF Al Al
71. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 o OF gt CO OF OF gt A OF Al OF gt oj oj gt CO CO OF Al OF OF OF OF A Al OF OF OF Al Al S CO Of CO CO OF OF CO oj OF Of OF OF OF OF Al oj oj CO CO OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF gt A Al S oo oj o CO Oj OF OF OF OF O O O O OF O OF OF OF Al OF OF OF Al O 0 oj oj Of CO OF A OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF A OF OF OF OF OF O OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF Al Al oj O OF Oj OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF O CO OF oj A Oj OF OF OF OF OF OF OF
72. After the transportation of the machine make sure to unlock the scanner unit by raising the lock lever 2 before turning on the machine s main switch 112 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 10 Display mode 10 Display mode LL z 10 1 Display function tree 5 Pressing the Display key will display the menu of the following functions 5 o DISPLAY TONER REMAINING P 113 TOTAL PAGE B W COPY P 114 COLOR COPY P 114 B W PRINT P 114 COLOR PRINT P 114 FAX PRINT P 114 TOTAL SCAN P 114 TX RX RESULT P 114 PRINT REPORT TX RESULT REPORT P 115 RX RESULT REPORT P 115 ACTIVITY REPORT P 115 MEMORY DATA LIST P 115 MEMORY IMAGE PRINT P 145 ONE TOUCH LIST P 116 SPEED DIAL LIST P 116 GROUP DIAL LIST P 116 MENU MAP P 116 CONFIGURATION PAGE P 116 DEMO PAGE 19 25 lt 10 2 TONER REMAINING Function Displays the amount of toner of each color still available for use Use For maintenance control of toner cartridges 10 3 PRINT STATUS Function Displays the status of the machine while a print job is being received Use To check the machine for the status of receiving a print job 113 magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 10 Display mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 10 4 TOTAL PAGE
73. OF OF OF Al oj oj CO OF 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF gt A Al S oo CO CO Oj OF OF OF O O OF O O O OF OF OF Al O OF OF oOo 0 oj oj Of CO OF A OF OF 9 OF OF OF A CO OF OF OF OF OF O Oj Oj OF OF OF OF OF OF mA OF Al OF OTN oj OF OF 9 OF OF OF O OF OF OF O O CO 090 090 OF OF OF CO Oj j Oj OF Oj A Oj ojojoj OF OF 0 oj oj oj 9 9 9 OF gt 9 O OF O OF O O O O gt O O O O O O O gt O O N O OF OF OF OF OF Al O A Al O oj oj CO Of O O gt OF O OF 9 9 OF oo ojojoj O OF O CO O 9 9 OF OF 9 9 CO OF Of OF CO 9 OF OF CO OJ OF OF CO Of
74. OOE7 Received DCN after sending PPS MPS OOE8 At phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS times consecutively but no answer OOE9 Receive PIN signal after sent last page three times OOEA Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS EOP OOEB At phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS EOM times consecutively but no answer OOEC Received incorrect response after sending PPS EOM OOED Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sent out PPS EOM 284 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 18 FAX error Code Possible Causes of Error OOEE Atphase D transmitting unit sends out EOR_NULL times consecutively but no answer OOEF Received incorrect response after sending EOR_NULL OOFO Did not receive any response procedure after sending EOR NULL OOF1 phase D transmitting unit sends out EOR MPS times consecutively but no answer OOF2 Received incorrect response after sending EOR MPS OOF3 Received ERR signal after sending EOR_MPS OOF4 Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending EOR_MPS OOF5 At phase D transmitting unit sends out times consecutively but no answer OOF6 Received incorrect response after sending EOR OOF7 After Received ERR our side can not receive response after sending EOR_EOP command OOF8 At phase D transmitting unit send
75. Of Of OF CO OF OF SA gt OF A gt oy oO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A gt Alo OF OF OF A Of OO OF OF CO SB GO CO Al OF gt oO Of OF OF OF gt gt OF A o gt Of OF OF Of Of OF OF OF OF OF OF OF gt AL S ojo A Of OF CO CO CO Al O O Of Of OF ODO OF OF Of OF CO Of o oo CO OO 0 O OF OF CO O ALO Ol oO Of oO oO OF OF OF CO OF gt Al o CO OF A COLO oO OQ QO Of OF OF CO OQ QO OF OL CO OF CO OF N Oj 9 9 OF OF OF CO CO CO OF OF OF O 9 OF O O OF OF OF O 9 O O O oj Oj O o o ojoj ojojoj 9 O O O 9 9 O 9 OF OF SH O JO CO O O O O O O OF gt gt oO gt O Of Of 9 OF OF
76. SOFT SWITCH SW01 SW16 00 20 SW17 SW32 00 00 SW33 SW48 co 82 SW49 SW64 01 00 80 68 10 00 SERVICE DATA LIST oc 00 00 07 61 00 00 80 06 00 00 00 8A 00 C1 00 08 00 00 00 BO 00 00 00 COMMUNICATION HISTORY 4 COUNTER 000001 000008 000000 000000 000000 000000 000001 000000 000000 000000 000000 000027 000002 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000007 000000 000849 000127 ECM RX TIME G3 RX TIME V 17 14 4K V 17 9 6K V 29 9 6K V 27 4 8K G3 TX TIME V 17 14 4K V 17 9 6K V 29 9 6K V 27 4 8K V 34 RX TIME 33 6K 28 8K 24 0K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K V 34 TX TIME 33 6K 28 8K 24 0K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K JBIG TX TIME TOTAL COUNTER COPY PRINT REPORT PRINT ADJUST PRN MAIN REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM 0 CCD MAIN REGIST 1 0 ADF MAIN REGIST 1 0 ADF SUB REGIST 2 0 0 4 RX IN MEMORY MAIN RAM SIZE 128MB ROM ID 2006 06 05 V0 38 81 00 80 10 00 28 00 7 14 68 00 00 04 00 06 00 00 21 00 000000 ECM TX TIME 000000 G3 RX PAGE 000000 V 17 12K 000000 V 17 7 2K 000000 V 29 7 2K 000001 V 27 2 4K 000000 G3 TX PAGE 000000 V 17 12K 000000 V 17 7 2K 000000 V 29 7 2K 000000 V 27 2 4K 000007 V 34 RX PAGE 000005 31 2 000000 26 4 000000 21 6K 000000 16 8K 000000 7 2K 000000 2 4K 000015 V 34 TX PAGE 000006 31 2K 000000 26 4 000000 21 6K 000000 16 8K 00
77. Setting MIX TEXT PHOTO procedure MIX Mix manual density TEXT Text auto density Text manual density PHOTO Photo manual density 8 4 2 DENSITY LEVEL A Function To set the density level when the Auto density is selected The default setting is LIGHT 1 0 1 DARK 8 4 3 DENSITY LEVEL M Function T Toset the density level when the Manual density is selected se Setting The default setting is QOOOSOOOF procedure LIGHT 3 2 1 Q 1 2 3 DARK 8 4 4 COLLATE T 2 lt Function Set initial value of sort function OFF Initial setting is non sort mode Ysg ON Initial setting is sort mode Setting The default setting is OFF procedure ON OFF 8 4 5 QUALITY Function Sets the print resolution Use To change the print resolution The default setting is NORMAL Setting NORMAL FINE procedure NORMAL 600 x 300 dpi FINE 600 x 600 dpi 90 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 4 6 PAPER PRIORITY Function Selects the priority tray Use To change the priority tray The default setting is TRAY1 Setting TRAY1 TRAY2 procedure NOTE NOT AVAILABLE is displayed if tray2 is not mounted in the machine 8 5 FAXREGISTR
78. The test pattern1 should be positioned vertically Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check that the width of E in the copy of the test pattern1 meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of E in the document Width of E in the copy x 100 If the width of E is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 6 Press the Menu Select key 7 Using the 4 key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass Then make a test copy again and check it Adjustment Instructions If the width of E in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Decrease the setting Ifthe width of E in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width 5 Increase the setting 129 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt magicolor 2590MF O lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 4 5 MAIN REGIST To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by vary Function od ing the scanning start position in the main scanning direction When the original glass is replaced When the Scanner unit has been replaced Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST
79. a 15 Error codes 15 4 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 OBH Ventilation fan motor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Ventilation fan motor FM2 Printer control board PRCB DC power supply1 DCPU1 Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electrical component Check the FM2 connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary Check FM2 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary FM2 operation check PRCB PJ10PRCB 1 REM PECB PJ10PRCB 3 LOCK Change PRCB Change DCPU1 15 4 5 OCH Power supply cooling fan motor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Power supply cooling fan motor FM1 Printer control board PRCB DC power supply1 DCPU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 1 Check the FM1 connector for proper con _ nection and correct as necessary 2 Check FM1 for proper drive coupling and 2 correct as necessary 3 Check the PRCB connector for proper con A E nection and correct as necessary 4 FM1 operation check 1 2 PRCB PJ4PRCB 3 LOCK Change PRCB Change DCPU1 244 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 Error codes 15 4 6 10H Polygon moto
80. 06 30 07 00 07 30 4 Bit No 6 1 1 1 1 4 Bit No 5 0 0 0 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 218 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 61 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 3 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX magicolor 2590MF Time between Greenwich mean time T 6 mean time 08 00 08 30 09 00 09 30 0 Bit No 6 1 1 1 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No N oj o o oj 9 oj o of gt Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 4 Bit No 6 1 1 Time Between GMT Bit No Greenwich Mean 5 Time Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No ol Bl oj oj o oj gt a gt Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 12 00 Reserved Bit No 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 1 Bit No a a a a al a of o a 5 a N o S S Oj gt O a lt Bit1 6 This value must be entered c
81. 10 Remove the screw 1 11 Disconnect four connectors 2 and remove the power switch 3 NOTE At reinstallation make sure of the correct position of each connector 5 7 i Color of connector Color of harness 1 White Black 2 Red Black 3 White White 4 Red White 12 Remove three saddles 1 and free the harness 4139F2C535DA 21 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Remove three screws 1 and the NCU board 2 Then remove the S protection film 3 n NOTE 8 Make sure to reinstall the protection film 2 1 4139F2C661DA 14 Disconnect two connectors MPJ2 MPJ3 1 from the image processing board 5 4139F2C662DA 15 Remove nine screws 1 and remove the left frame 2 4139F2C537DA 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F2C539DA 4139F2C540DA 4139F2C530DA 3 Periodic check 16 Remove two screws 1 and remove the left guide assy 2 N CAUTION When the left guide assy is mounted after the fusing unit has been installed make sure that the harness of the fusing unit is placed under the left guide assy 17 Unplug two connectors 1 18 Swing open the fusing unit gear cover 1 23 magicolor 2590MF 5 7 2 i
82. 103 812 NETWORK SETTING niin erit eee Maren 103 821 IPADDRESS 103 8 12 22 SUBNET 103 812 3 GATEWAY 28 tiendas 104 8 124 DNS CONFIG 104 8 12 5 DDNS CONFIG 104 8 13 E MAIL SETTING 105 8134 SENDER NAMB ceti neni 105 8 13 2 E MAIL ADDRESS aine nhe Fri EEG s ara 105 8 13 8 SMTP SERVER ciassa istic sb 105 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8434 SMTP PORT 105 8 13 5 SMTP TIMEOUT aa 105 813 6 TEXT INSERT 106 8 13 7 DEFAULT 5 106 814 SCANNER SETTING eH 106 944 1 106 8442 IMAGE FORMAT uD be FERE e ERES 106 8443 CODING METHOD corri ciem tei ca e t ted 106 9 UsarerviceTrOQB uci 107 9 1 User service mode function tree a 107 9 2 2000 0000 00000000 nennen ennt nnne 108 9 2 1 iie etia adipe iiti iustitie iare 108 9 2 2 a edgcizpm S 108 9 2 3 Su eod cen ern EOS CHE cen EISE 108 9 2 4 RX LEVEL 108 9 2 5 DIMI EVEL 108 9 2 6 CNG
83. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 E lt CO Of Of gt OSO O OF OF OF gt A OF Al S OF OF oj gt oj CO gt CO ojoj Al oj OF OF A Al OF CO OF OF Al oj CO Of CO OF OF Al 9 S OF OF OF Al oj oj CO CO OF A 9 OF 9 OF OF 9 OF gt gt A Al S oo oj oj CO OF A OF OF o 9 OF OF A 090 OF OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OTN oj O OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Oj OF OF O CO OJ OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF 9 OF OF Al 0 oj oj 9
84. 179 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 6 SOFT SWITCH 06 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 Ring on time to ignore 50 ms 150ms 800 ring off time at 1st cycle Bit No 8 0 1 1 f BtNo 7 0 0 1 i 0 Reserved Reserved 5 0 Ring off time at 1st 4 cycle to approve Timing 1 incoming ring ms 100ms 250ms 500 ms Bit No 4 0 0 1 B Bit No 3 0 1 0 1 F 2 Pulse cycle to Cycle 1 2 3 1 approve ring fre Bit No 8 0 0 1 1 Bit No 7 0 1 0 1 2 lt 180 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 37 SOFT SWITCH 07 Initial 2 Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX E E 8 Dial tone or busy tone 121222195 0 detection 1 Enable Detect dial tone before dial 0 PSTN 7 PSTN PBX setting 0 1 PBX Select PBX line type 0 Not to detect dial tone before pre fix number 6 PBX dial tone detect 0 1 Detect dial tone before the pre fix number in PBX mode 0 DTMF PB 5 Dial mode select 0 1 Pulse DP 4 Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 Bit No 4 Bit
85. Increase the setting Instructions If the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting 126 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 4 2 PRN SUB REGIST Function To vary and adjust the print start position in the sub scanning direction Use If the image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST adjustment has been performed Adjustment Specification Adjust the width of C in the printed test pattern1 so that the following specification is met 20 2 5mm lt lt lt a 4139F3C547DA Adjustment 6 00 6 00 mm 0 0 mm 6 00 6 00 mm Range Step 0 33 mm 1 Print the test pattern See 137 2 Check that the width of C in the test pattern1 meets the specification Setting If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure Procedure 3 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 4 Select PRN SUB REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key twice 5 Using the A Y key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 6 Print a test pattern1 again and check it Ifthe width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Adjustment Increase the setting Instructions If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width
86. Instruct the user in correct media storage Is a foreign object present along the media path or is the media path deformed or worn Clean or change the media path Are the rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operational Correct or change the defective actuator 25 Auto Document D 2 Q 5 Feeder Unit 7 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 3 2 Misfeed at the document feeding section A Detection timing Type Description Detection of mis feed at the docu The paper feed sensor PS2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a predeter ment feeding mined period of time after the main motor M1 has been energized section Auto Document Feeder Unit Detection of paper left at the document feeding section The paper feed sensor PS2 is unblocked when the power switch is turned ON the cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Main motor M1 DF control board DFCB Paper feed sensor PS2 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the DFCB connector f
87. KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL magicolor 2590 2007 08 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING 5 S 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE 0 5 1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION S 1 WARNINGS URP RUPEE WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT Composition of the service eene Notation of the service magicolor 2590MF Main body General rt ceo ner ae erin aie 81 Troubleshooting nre 233 Appendix A rhetor a Su uuu 287 Auto Document Feeder Unit General 1 tede uq aa ae ees 3 Adjustment Setting nere 15 TOUDIOSNOOUING EM 23 Lower Feeder Unit 1 Maintenance n 3 Troubleshooting 11 Duplex Option Generale t tcc abd CU d WE M REDE D IC EN 1 Maintehance rime edet eben 3 isse 15 Blank Page SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT W
88. OF gt A Al 9 oj oj O OF OF OF OF 9 9 OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al 0 S CO OF CO CO OF CO 9 9 9 9 9 9 OF OJ 9 OF O O O CO OF OF OF A OF Oj O O OF OF Oj O OF OF OF OF OF Al 0 gt CO Of OF OF CO CO A OF OF OF 0 OF gt OF oj OF O OF OF OF O 9 OF OF O CO OF OF OF oj OF O CO CO CO 9 O s O 9 OF CO 9 9 O OF oj 9 OF OF OF Al Al 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF gt OF O OF O O O O gt A O Al O O O O O gt b O O gt O O N OJ O O O O j O O O Oj O O O O O O O O OF OF Al OF O O O oj oj CO S OF SA O OF OF Of OF OF S oo oj ojoj gt S CO OF oj CO 9 9 9 9 OF OF CO OF Of OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF CO Of CO OF gt OF OF
89. Setting ON OFF procedure The default setting is 1 if ON is selected 0 5 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 8 2 2 ENERGY SAVE MODE Function To specify the time until the machine enters Energy Save mode after a copy cycle has Use been completed or after the last key operation Setting The default setting is 30 minutes procedure 5 5 min 15 15 min 30 30 min 60 60 min 8 2 3 LCD CONTRAST Function Sets the brightness of the LCD display Use To set the brightness of the LCD display Setting The default setting is procedure LIGHT 1 0 1 2 DARK 8 2 4 LANGUAGE O lt Function Sets the language of the control panel display Use To change the language of the control panel display The default setting is ENGLISH ENGLISH FRENCH GERMAN ITALIAN Setting SPANISH PORTUGUESE RUSSIAN CZECH procedure SLOVAKIAN HUNGARIAN POLISH JAPANESE NOTE The default setting of language is subject to the setting of FAX PTT SETTING 8 2 5 LAMP OFF TIME Function Sets the timing at which the scanner unit lamp turns OFF MODE1 When four hours have passed since the last operation was performed MODE2 When the machine enters Energy Save mode Setting The default setting is MODE1 procedure Use
90. eine citt teet cared 66 Rack motor 2 tret ntn rete rn inrer ieri Eire 67 Scanner motor 5 edicta cac ete 68 IR cooling fan motor FM3 a 69 Tray1 paper pick up Solenoid 51 70 Registration roller solenoid 502 70 Pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 503 71 Pressure retraction solenoid 2nd image transfer SD4 Temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS 74 IDC sensor IDO 75 AOR 75 ECIAM 77 Speaker SP enu reich eiii erue eet Ed rete EL e EU 80 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Adjustment Setting 6 How to use the adjustment section a 81 7 Description of the control panel a 82 7 1 Control panel 82 TAA EIE 82 7 1 2 Toner supply screen rer eran nter rti enero 82 8 8 1 Menu mode function 1 aids 8 2 MACHINE SETTING 8 2 1 AUTO PANEL RESET 8 2 2 ENERGY SAVE MODE 86 8 2 3 M 86 8 2 4 LANGUAGE
91. m Decrease the setting 127 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T O lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 4 3 MAIN ZOOM Function To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the main scanning direction When the Scanner unit has been replaced NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been performed Adjustment Specification Adjust the width of D in the copy of the test pattern1 so that the following specification is met 100 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 4139F3C548DA Adjustment Range 2 0 0 2 0 Step 0 4 Setting Procedure 1 Print the test pattern See P 137 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select CCD MAIN ZOOM of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass and make a test NOTE The test pattern1 should be positioned vertically Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check that the width of D in the copy of the test pattern1 meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of D in the document Width of D in the copy x 100 If the width of D is out of spe
92. prr ndi 147 142 2 MEMORY GLEAR ii tt cabe i 147 12 SOFTLISWITCHS6t niet recen ree nee 148 12 17 Description tie erga EHI HERR 148 12 2 eto rrr rr I rr E oe etr POE OI ERRARE MR 148 12 2 1 Country for each marketing area seen 148 12 2 2 Soft switch 149 12 2 3 Default soft switch setting for each market 153 12 3 Soft switch definition 12 3 1 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 2 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 3 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 4 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 5 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 6 SOFT SWITCH 12 8 7 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 8 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 9 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 10 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 11 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 12 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 13 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 14 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 15 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 16 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 17 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 18 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 19 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 20 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 21 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 22 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 23 SOFT SWITCH Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 24 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 25 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 26 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 27 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 28 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 29 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 30 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 31 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 32 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 33 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 34 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 35 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 36 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 37 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 38 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 39 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 40 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 41 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 42 SOFT SWITCH 12 3
93. 1 6 1 8 Bit No Bit No a po O o o o o o o o o of o 2lo 2 olo Time sec 2 0 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 8 3 0 3 2 3 4 3 6 3 8 Bit No 5 Bit No 4 Bit No 3 2 1 Bit No Bit No Time To dial after seize the line when tone Ti 4214414614815 015 215 41 5 615 8 Unit 200 msec ime 4 2 4 4 4 6 4 8 5 0 5 2 5 415 615 Bit No 5 2 Bit No 4 Bit No 3 2 E o o a a alo a a a alo O O O gt al alolo a Bit No Bit No a of _ o O gt alolo 23 2 a alo o alo ala a Time sec 6 0 6 2 Bit No 5 1 Bit No 4 Bit No 3 2 1 T 2 lt Bit No Bit No a a a a a a 198 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 30 SOFT SWITCH 30 12 SOFT SWITCH set Bit No Designation Function Initial Setting Bit HEX Pause delay time within digits 002 Time sec 2 0 3
94. 264 17 2 10 Uneven density in FD 265 5 17 241 Uneven density ip 266 17 2 12 Low image density U U u enne nennt enne 267 17 2 13 Gradation reproduction failure sene 268 Xi magicolor 2590MF 2 lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 214 Foggy background nerit nein itti tn 269 17 2 15 Poor color reproduction u u u u 270 17 2 16 Void areas white 271 17 2 17 Colored 5 272 17 2 18 Blurred image 273 17 2 19 Blank copy black 274 17 2 20 Incorrect color image registration 275 17 2 21 Poor fusing performance 276 17 2 22 Brush effect blurred 277 17 22 23 Back MatkinG 278 17 2 24 Uneven pitch terne eti donent 279 18 FAX error 18 1 280 18 2 280 18 3 Error occurring during transmission 280 18 3 1 Error occurring during reception
95. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt oj ojoj S O OF CO OF OF OF OF oj CO O CO CO CO O OF OF CO CO OF CO OF Al O CO CO CO CO CO N oj ojoj CO OF OF OF 9 9 9 9 OC 0 oj oj oj o ojojoj OF 9 CO OF SAH OF o o O O O O O O O O 0 0 oj 9 Oj 9 OF Oj OF OF Al CO 0 0 oj oj oj Oj 9 oj O O O 0 OF oj ojoj CO OF CO OF OF OF CO CO CO CO N oj ojoj gt Of S CO S OF Of OF OF CO oj ojoj CO CO OF A CO CO OF OF OF CO S o OJ ooo oj CO Of OF Of OF OF OF Of OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Of CO CO OF CO OF Al Of CO
96. 6 FOOTER P 98 7 SELECT TRAY P 98 COMM SETTING 1 TEL LINE TYPE P 99 2 LINE MONITOR P 99 3 PSTN PBX P 99 REPORTING 1 ACTIVITY REPORT P 100 2 TX RESULT REPORT P 100 3 RX RESULT REPORT P 100 USER SETTING 1 FAX PTT SETTING 101 2 DATE amp TIME HOUR MINUTE YEAR P 101 MONTH DAY 3 DATE FORMAT 101 4 PRESET ZOOM 101 5 USER FAX 102 6 USER NAME P 102 DIRECT PRINT 1 IMAGE QUALITY P 102 2 PAPER SIZE TRAY1 PLAIN PAPER LABELS POSTCARD THICK STOCK dus GLOSSY TRAY2 3 N UP LAYOUT P 103 NETWORK SETTING 1 ADDRESS P 103 2 SUBNET MASK P 103 3 GATEWAY P 104 4 DNS CONFIG P 104 5 DDNS CONFIG P 104 84 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode Menu Mode E MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME P 105 2 E MAIL ADDRESS P 105 3 SMTP SERVER P 105 4 SMTP PORT NO P 105 5 SMTP TIMEOUT P 105 6 TEXT INSERT P 106 7 DEFAULT SUBJECT P 106 SCANNER SETTING 1 RESOLUTION P 106 2 IMAGE FORMAT P 106 3 CODING METHOD P 106 85 magicolor 2590MF A lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 2 MACHINE SETTING 5 8 2 1 AUTO PANEL RESET 5 Sets the period of time after which the initial screen reappears after the last print job is 8 received or the last panel key is operated Use To set the period of time by executing auto panel reset The default setting is ON
97. CO oj CO Of CO CO CO OF CO OF CO AIT N oj gt Of 9 9 CO OF OF CO CO CO CO 154 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 B Market area 2 12 SOFT SWITCH set Soft Switch No Marketing area Austria Belgium Brazil Canada Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 o OF gt CO OF OF gt A OF Al OF gt oj oj gt CO CO OF Al OF OF OF OF A Al OF OF OF Al S CO Of CO CO OF OF Al 9 oj OF OF OF OF OF OF Al oj oj CO O CO O 9 O O 9 OF 9 OF
98. Click Update Update F W Tool EAE x File path C me2590M FY407F axF p bin Update Exit 4139F2E679DA 25 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 4 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Firmware updating starts ERASE FLASH ROM FIRMWARE UPDATE 4139F2E654DB 9 When Transfer Successfully message appears on the screen click OK to close the execution tool Update F W Tool 3 09 xj Transfer Successfully 4139F2E680DA 10 Confirm that FIRMWARE UPDATE OK message has been displayed and turn OFF ON the machine s main switch FIRMWARE UPDATE OK MACHINE POWER OFF ON 4139F2E656DB 26 11 Print Configuration Page to confirm the Controller Firmware Version See P 116 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Firmware upgrade 42 NIC firmware upgrading 4 2 1 Preparations for firmware upgrading NOTE Make sure that the machine s network is correctly connected to the PC Before updating the firmware print Configuration Page to confirm the current NIC Firmware Version See 116 magicolor 2590MF 4 2 2 Upgrading procedure Connect the machine and PC using the USB cable Turn ON the machine s main switch Copy the firmware data and upgrading program in any arbitrary directory of the PC Double click Update exe Click Browse and select
99. D S 5 279 18 FAX error Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 18 FAX error 181 Communication error COMM ERROR 0001 o tO 9 4139F4E512DA 18 2 Outline Error caused by a problem of communication functioning Five possible causes of errors are Communication is discontinued by a machine error Communication is discontinued by a machine trouble Communication is discontinued by an error occurring at the destination station Communication is discontinued by a protocol error ADF Error on trouble When communication is discontinued due to item 3 or 4 transmission is retried In other case transmission is canceled without retry AARON gt 18 3 Error occurring during transmission The transmission error before Phase B performs redial according to the redial interval of each country and the number of times The transmission error after Phase C performs redial only one time Transmission is canceled when an error occurs again can change in Soft SW When an error occurs by ADF TX transmission is canceled without redial This machine G3 machine Transmission Receiving START CNG Phase key press j ED R side start A DIS CSI 5 t EOM TX CER 7 N ES 8 at EOM RX s S 4 PIX 22 ie
100. Initial A Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E 8 0 Reserved Reserved 0 6 0 0 5 Interval 1 11213 4 5 617 89 10 11 0 BitNo 5 0 0 0 0 BitNo 4 1 111 4 BitNo 3 1 111 0 BitNo 2 11 11 1 1 Re dial interval BitNo 1 11 01 110 11 01 11 01 11 0 1 3 unit minute 0 Interval min 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 If the BtNo 5 0 4 4 14 1 4 2 SW18 1 to 4 Bit No 4 1111111 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Machine doesn t refer Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 This setting Kept BtNo 1 O refer SW8 1 to 4 set ting Interval min Reserved BitNo 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 71 1 4 1 BtNo 4 11111111110 BtNo 3 1 1 11 10 01 01 0 11 11 1 1 2 0 1 11 10 01 11 1 01 01 1 1 1 1 0 11 101 11 01 1 01 11 0 1 lt 191 magicolor 2590MF Em e 5 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 21 SOFT SWITCH 21 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX NSS signal before 0 Not to send NSS signal for self mode in TX mode 4 D
101. OF OF OF oj Of oj 9 OF OF OF OF OF oj OF CO OF Al 9 OF 9 163 magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Soft Switch No Marketing area Italy Japan Korea Malaysia z Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 ojojoj CO OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF A oO CO CO Oj O o CO CO OF CO OF CO OF OF OF OF Al O CO O CO CO CO CO N oj ojoj CO CO CO GO CO Of GO o GO ojoj Of ojojoj ojoj CO OF OF OF OF 9 o o
102. Setting If ON is selected select generate report and send to remote side when toner runs out procedure Enter the telephone number for which the report is to be produced Fax number specifications An up to 20 digit number that may consist of 0 9 7 pause and space 0 9 pause The report will generate after 20 minutes 24 hours 48 hours or 72 hours after the event has occurred or until the condition is gone A Toner empty report example NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Jul 01 2006 15 12 The Fax s following conditions were appears the machine may be can not work correctly the Fax already send a report to your dealer automatically They will contact with you soon SERVICE REPORT Toner status Empty 4139F3C545DA 11 3 11 PROTOCOL REPORT Function Print communication report Use Choose one from among the following The default setting is OFF Setting OFF Disable T 30 communication report procedure ON Print T 30 communication report ON ERROR Print T 30 communication report when an error occurs 11 3 12 GDI TIMEOUT Function To specify the time for GDI time out Use The default setting is 6 60 seconds Setting procedure 0 5sec 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec 11 3 13 ENERGY SAVE MODE Function Set weather to activate Energy Save mode when print job receiving or
103. When transporting the machine 1 Enter the user service mode 2 Select CCD MOVE TO HOME and press the Menu Select key 3 The scanner unit moves to the home position when the start key is pressed 4 Turn OFF the machine s main switch 5 Open the IR unit Then inserting a pin or similar object into the hole at portion 1 lower the lock lever 2 1 2 O lt Setting procedure 4139F3C525DA NOTE After the transportation of the machine make sure to unlock the scanner unit by raising the lock lever 2 before turning on the machine s main switch 138 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 7 6 FAX RES COPY TEST Function Fax resolution copy test Use To check whether the encoding decoding process is correct Setting The paper source is fixed to Tray1 Tray cannot be changed procedure When 4 or Letter is not loaded in Tray1 operation of printing is not performed magicolor 2590MF 11 7 7 SCAN TEST Function To check the lighting of the Exposure Lamp and the movement of the scanner Use If the scanner malfunctions Setting 1 Press the Start key to begin the scanner test procedure 2 Press the Stop key to stop the scanner test A lt 139 11 SERVICE MODE Fie
104. YES Clean gerprints or oil Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 4 115 the transfer belt dirty or a soft cloth 4 jiransierBeltunit scratched Replace the scratched transfer belt with a new transfer belt unit 5 ls tha 2nd tran feriroller dirty or YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller scratched 6 Paper path Is there a object in the YES Remove the foreign object paper path Is the fusing roller dirty or 7 Fusing unit scratched YES Replace the fusing unit 8 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the toner cartridge 272 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 18 Blurred image A Typical faulty images Blurred image magicolor 2590MF ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 403616403100 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 unit Is the window surface dirty YES Clean 2 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the drum cartridge after performing step 2 Replace the PH unit D 2 5 273 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 19 Blank copy black copy A Typical faulty images Blank print Black print magicolor 2590MF 403615403800 403615403900 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section C
105. and remove the paper feed unit 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C602DA 5 3 23 Main motor M1 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 2 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 7 2 i 3 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 4139F2C562DA 59 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 Field Service 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Remove the speaker See P 80 5 Remove nine screws 1 and the right frame 2 4139F2C563DA 6 Remove four screws 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the main motor 3 1 4139F2C578DA 5 3 24 Power supply cooling fan motor 1 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 2 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 4139F2C553DA 60 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 3 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C562DA 4 Remove the speaker See P 80 5 Remove nine screws 1 and the right frame 2 7 i 4139F2C563DA 6 Disconnect the connector PJ4 1 from the printer control board 4139F2C579DA 61 magicolor 2590MF 5 Other cx 4139F2C565DA ay 4139F2C580DA 62 Field Service Ver
106. gt OF 9 OF OF OF oj OF OF A Al Al o oj OF gt OF OF OF gt Al CO CO OF gt OF 9 OF A oj oj gt OF gt A oj o oj gt OF 9 OF OF CO oj CO CO CO OF OF oj OF OF oj oj CO O OF OF CO OF OF 9 9 OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF mA Al 0 S CO OF O OF o 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A OF O Oj o OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF Al CO gt CO Of OF OF CO CO A OF OF o 9 OF oj OF oj A OF O OF OF OF 9 9 9 OF OF CO OF OF O OF OF OF OF OF CO CO CO
107. right frame 2 65 magicolor 2590MF 7 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 s 5 Other 3 2 4139F2C577DA 5 3 27 Developing motor M3 1 Open the top cover See 31 2 Remove the right cover See 32 3 Remove the front cover See P 33 N 4139F2C592DA 4139fs2068c2 66 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 6 Remove two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 7 Remove the harness from the wiring saddle 3 and remove the fusing motor 4 4 Remove the screw 1 and the safety Switch 2 Precautions for reinstallation of the safety switch assy Check that the switch is actuated with the front cover and the upper cover closed Make sure that the distance between the switch lever and switch case with the switch in the actuated position falls within the specified range Specifications 0 1 to 1 0 mm Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 Remove four screws 1 and the rack drive assy 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C593DA 6 Remove two screws 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the developing motor 3 7 i s gt 4139F2C594DA 5 3 28 Rack motor M2 1 Remove the rack drive assy See steps 1 through 5 of the removal procedure for Developing motor 3 66 2 Re
108. 0 Aug 2007 Recording paper size Foot er Length of received image Printing 4 OFF Less than 289 mm 1 page with 100 290 mm to 385 mm 1 page with 289 image length reduction 386 mm to 570 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 571 mm to 851 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 852 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 100 ON Less than 285 mm 1 page with 100 286 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 285 mm image length reduction 382 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages with 10096 563 mm to 839 mm Divide into 3 pages with 10096 840 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 10096 Letter OFF Less than 271 mm 1 page with 10096 272 mm to 387 mm 1 page with 271 mm image length reduction 388 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages with 10096 535 mm to 797 mm Divide into 3 pages with 10096 798 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 10096 ON Less than 267 mm 1 page with 10096 268 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 267 mm image length reduction 382 mm to 526 mm Divide into 2 pages with 10096 527 mm to 785 mm Divide into 3 pages with 10096 786 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 10096 Legal OFF Less than 347 mm 1 page with 10096 348 mm to 385 mm 1 page with 347 mm image length reduction 386 mm to 686 mm Divide into 2
109. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DIS TCF FF 13 80 00 00 00 00 00 FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PIX 53 83 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 EOP CFR FF 1384 DCN TRAINING PHASE FF 13 BF 2F 00 00 41 MCF 13 8C FF 13 FB DATA PHASE 4139F3C554DA 145 gt e o tO N e 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 10 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE Function The fixed zoom ratios can be changed Use 1 Enter the SERVICE MODE Setting 2 Select FIXED ZOOM CHANGE and press the Menu Select key procedure 3 Select fixed zoom ratio that you wish to change and press the Menu Select key 4 Use the 10 Key Pad to type in the desired fixed zoom ratio us z e o tO ra 9 Default fixed zoom ratios and setting ranges according to marketing area lt Metric gt Setting name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting range REDUCTION2 70 51 to 70 REDUCTION1 81 71 to 99 EXPANSION1 115 101 to 140 EXPANSION2 141 141 to 199 Inch Setting name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting range REDUCTION2 64 51 to 64 REDUCTION1 78 65 to 99 EXPANSION1 129 101 to 153 EXPANSION2 154 154 to 199 11 14 FACTORY TEST This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used Functi
110. 1 Power Supply Connection to Power Supply WARNING Check that mains voltage is as specified Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or Q electric shock Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity grounding and result in fire or electric shock If proper wall outlet is not available advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet qb If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely Contact problems may lead to increased resistance overheating and the risk of fire Check whether the product is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product you may suffer electric shock while operating the product Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet 5 4 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord WARNING When using the power cord set inlet
111. 1 and remove the two screws 2 Then remove the DF control board 3 3 4139F2C638DA 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 1 2 3 3 8 Main motor Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See P 8 Open the top cover Remove the rear cover See 9 4139F2C640DA 3 Other 4 Disconnect the connector 01 1 from the DF control board 5 Remove two screws 1 and the main motor 2 11 Auto Document Feeder Unit 7 i 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 34 Cleaning procedure NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure is isopropyl alcohol 3 4 1 Paper feed roller Auto Document Feeder Unit 1 Open the top cover 2 Wipe the paper feed roller 1 clean of dirt using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol 4139F2C648DA 5 3 4 2 Pick up roller 1 Open the top cover 2 Wipe the pick up roller 1 clean of dirt using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol 4139F2C649DA 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 4 3 Registration rollers 1 Open the top cover 4139F2C650DA 3 Other 2 Wipe the registration rollers 1 clean of dirt using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol 13 Auto Document Feeder Unit i gt 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0
112. 1 0 Aug 2007 7 Remove the screw 1 bracket 2 and guide 3 8 Remove the wiring saddle 1 9 Remove the screw 2 and the har ness cover 3 10 Remove the tab 1 and the power supply cooling fan motor 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 25 Ventilation fan motor 2 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 2 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 magicolor 2590MF 3 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 7 4139F2C562DA 4 Remove the speaker See P 80 5 Remove nine screws 1 and the right frame 2 4139F2C563DA 63 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 6 Remove two screws 1 and the bracket 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C574DA 7 Disconnect the connector 1 of the ventilation fan motor and remove the harness from the wiring saddle 2 5 2 4139F2C575DA 8 Remove five tabs 1 and the ventila tion fan motor 2 1 4139F2C576DA 64 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 26 Fusing motor M4 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 4139F2C562DA 4 Remove the speaker See P 80 4139F2C563DA 5 Other 2 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 3 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 5 Remove nine screws 1 and the
113. 1 Number of times a High capacity toner cartridge K has been replaced 2 Number of times a Standard capacity toner cartridge K has been replaced 3 Number of times a High capacity toner cartridge C has been replaced 4 Number of times a Standard capacity toner cartridge C has been replaced 5 Number of times a High capacity toner cartridge M has been replaced 6 Number of times Standard capacity toner cartridge has been replaced 7 Number of times a High capacity toner cartridge has been replaced 8 Number of times a Standard capacity toner cartridge has been replaced 9 Rate of transfer roller remaining 10 Number of times a transfer roller has been replaced 11 Rate of transfer belt unit remaining 12 Number of times a transfer belt unit has been replaced 118 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 10 Display mode No Contents m 13 Rate of fusing unit remaining 96 5 14 Number of times fusing unit has been replaced N S 8 10 6 11 DEMO PAGE Function Prints the demo page Use Settino 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 9 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key procedure 3 Select the DEMO PAGE and then press the Menu Select key A lt 119 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVI
114. 2 1 Remove the right cover See P8 2 Remove two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 3 Remove the harness from the har ness holder 3 and then remove the transport motor 4 2 Remove two screws 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the reverse motor 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 3 7 Registration solenoid SD1 1 Remove the right cover See P8 2 Disconnect the connector 1 3 Remove the screw 2 and the pro tective cover 3 Duplex Option 4 Remove the registration solenoid 1 7 i 4057F2C517DA 13 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 34 Cleaning procedure NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure is isopropyl alcohol 3 4 1 Transport roller Duplex Option A Cleaning procedure 1 Open the duplex door 2 Usinga cleaning pad dampened with alcohol wipe the transport rollers 1 clean of dirt 5 2 4057F2C500DA 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Jam display Troubleshooting 4 Jam display 41 List of display messages Duplex Option When a media misfeed occurs the printer shows the corresponding media misfeed sta tus by means of the Error indicator on the control panel or LCD display CAUTION PAPER JAM CAUTION OPEN DUPLEX COVER Error
115. 2 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the IDC sensor 2 2 Remove the screw 1 and the paper feed clutch 3 Disassemble the paper feed clutch and remove the torque limiter 2 75 magicolor 2590MF 7 2 i magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 Other B Reinstallation procedure S 4139152513 0 4139F2C605DA 4139F2C606DA ee 4139F2C607DA 76 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 NOTE There are five slots provided in the coupling gear 1 of the Paper Feed Clutch These slots are for adjust ing the position of the Feed Roller When the torque limiter 2 is rein stalled it is necessary to adjust the position of the coupling gear 1 and torque limiter 2 so that any paper take up failure can be pre vented Install the paper feed clutch 1 Turn the paper feed clutch 1 in the direction of the arrow shown on the left until it is engaged with the sole noid and stopped ML 3 If the feed roller 1 tilts in the clock wise direction turn the coupling gear of the paper feed clutch in the direc tion of A and reassemble the Paper Feed Clutch 4 Ifthe feed roller 1 tilts in the coun terclockwise direction turn the cou pling gear of the paper feed clutch in the direction of B and reassemble the paper feed clutch Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3
116. 2 hook key dial Bit No 4 0 0 1 1 3 Bit No 3 0 1 0 1 0 0 5 2 0 Reserved Reserved lt 1 0 194 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 26 SOFT SWITCH 26 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX magicolor 2590MF 8 tone detection Time unit sec 15 20 25 0 time before discon Bit No 8 0 1 1 nected A 1 1 a 1 A 1 Level dBm 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No N wo A Q S S OJ o oj o o ojoj oj oj CO 1 EN 1 A 1 A T a 1 1 EN 1 1 1 N Level dBm Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No A Q o S j O alo ojoj 3 Dial tone Insensitivity Level dBm 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 0 0 to 40 dBm Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No lt N o o oj o o o o olof a a a
117. 200 sheets Tray capacities Transparencies thick stock postcards labels stock y cap and glossy stock 50 sheets Envelopes 10 sheets C Media Paper source maximum tray capacity Type 1 Tray2 Option Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib O 200 sheets O 500 sheets Thick stock 91 to 163 g m 25 to 40 Ib Media Transparency type Postcards O 50 sheets Letterhead Label Glossy media Envelope O 10 envelopes 92 to 216 mm Width i 3 1 to 8 inch Media we A4 Letter dimensions 148 to 356 mm Length 5 3 4 to 14 inch D Maintenance Machine durability 200 000 prints or 5 years whichever comes first 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 E Machine specifications 5 Voltage AC 110 V to 127V 10 6 AC 120 10 only US Canada Power requirements AC 220 to 240 V 10 5 Frequency 150 to 60 Hz 3 Hz Max power consumption 1 100 W or less 528 W x 475 D x 531 mm 20 75 W x 18 75 D x 21 H inch Weight 33 kg 72 75 Ib or less 39 kg 86 Ib or less include packing material During standby 39 dB A or less Operating noise During printing 52 dB A or less During copying 57 dB A or less with ADF F Operating environment 10 C to 35 50 F to 95 F with a fluctuation of 10 C 18 F or less per Temperature hour Humidity 15 to 85 with a
118. 3 4139F2C660DA 7 i gt 4 Remove the NCU board See 47 5 Remove the LAN board See 48 6 Remove five screws 1 and remove the interface metal plate 2 4139F2C666DA 39 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 Remove four wire saddle 1 and dis connect all connectors from the image processing board 2 magicolor 2590MF 2 4139F2C667DA 8 Remove seven screws 1 9 Disconnect the connector 2 from the printer control board and remove the image processing board 3 5 4139F2C668DA 40 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 12 Printer control board 1 Remove the rear cover See 31 2 Remove the screw 1 and the con nector protective bracket 2 3 Disconnect all connectors and flat cables from the printer control board magicolor 2590MF 4 Remove four screws 1 5 Disconnect the connector 2 from the image processing board and remove the printer control board 3 7 i 4139F2C550DA 6 Remove parameter chip PJ24 1 from the printer control board NOTE When the printer control board PRCB has been replaced be sure to remount parameter chip PJ24 Remove parameter chip PJ24 from the old printer control board and mount it on the new printer
119. 34 OOBB Every time our side received DIS signal after sending DTC in V 34 283 magicolor 2590MF a 5 magicolor 2590MF D a 18 FAX error Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Code Possible Causes of Error 0 not ready within 10 second after entering primary channel in V 34 OOBD not detect correct V 21 or JM signal after detected FSK frequency OOBE Remote side no document to be polled after V8 handshaking Capability not match after V8 handshaking 00CO Remote side disconnect before entering primary channel in V 34 00C1 At phase D transmitting unit sends out EOP 3 times consecutively but receives no answer from receiving unit 00C2 Remote side disconnect after sending out V 8 CM signal 00 4 After sending MPS signal the received signal is not one of MCF PIP PIN RTP DCN 0005 Received DCN signal after sending MPS signal 0009 Atphase D sending MPS times consecutively but no answer from receiving unit 00CA After sending EOP signal the received signal is not one of MCF RTN PIP PIN PRI EOP DCN OOCB After sending EOP signal the received signal is DCN signal OOCC After sending EOM signal the received signal is not one of MCF RTN P
120. 4 500 pages 6 000 pages A Conditions for life specifications values The life specification values represent the number of pages printed or figures equivalent to it when the given conditions see the table below are met They may be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user Item Description 5 Drum cartridge CW ratio 5 or less Print condition 3 Toner cartridge CW ratio monochrome continuous print at 5 Transfer belt unit Paper size 1 sided print on 45 11 x 8 S magicolor 2590MF 5 2 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 Maintenance procedure NOTE The alcohol referred to in the following procedures is isopropyl alcohol 3 3 1 Paper feed roller A Cleaning procedure 1 Pull the lever 1 and swing open the IR unit 2 NOTE Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position 4139F2C514DA 2 Open the top cover See 31 3 Remove the drum cartridge See P 16 NOTE Position the removed drum car tridge as shown in the illustration at the left Be sure to keep the drum cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty Do not leave the drum cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes and do not place the removed drum cartridge in a lo
121. 4057F4E505DA Display Misfeed location Misfeed clearing location Ref page CAUTION Duplex Option reverse drive stor P17 PAPER JAM age section Duplex option door CAUTION Duplex Option paper feed section 18 OPEN DUPLEX COVER 4 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the relevant door clear the sheet of misfeed paper and close the door D Q 5 15 4 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 42 Sensor layout Duplex Option 4 4057F4C501DA fe c a 1 Exit sensor PS7 3 Fusing paper loop sensor PS8 2 Transport sensor PS3 4 Paper loop sensor 51 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Jam display 43 Solution 4 3 1 Initial check items 2 Q When a media misfeed occurs check the following S 10 Check Item Action 8 Does the media meet product specifications Change the media Change the media Is the media curled wavy or damp p Instruct the user in correct media storage Is a foreign object present along the media path or is the media path deformed or worn Are the rolls rollers dirty delormed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Clean or change the media path Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct Set as necessary positi
122. 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 168 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set Market area 9 Marketing area Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovakia South Africa Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 4 Soft Switch No magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 lt CO Of OF gt S O OF OF gt A OF Al OF OF gt oj oj gt OF CO OF Al 9 oj OF OF A Al OF oj OF OF O Al Of CO OF OF Al oj 9
123. 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF oj gt OF 9 gt CO CO N OF OF OF CO CO Oj Oj Oj CO O OF OF OF Al CO oj oj CO O OF gt OF O O 9 9 OF OF oo oj ojoj O S CO OF CO CO CO CO 9 9 OF 9 CO OF Of S CO 9 OF OF OJ OF CO Of gt OF OF OF 9 OF oj OF o o o 0 CO OF 9 9 9 OF OF OF OF oj ojoj gt 9 9 OF 9 OF OF gt OF oj OF OF OF oj oj gt CO A oj gt OF 9 OF OF S CO CO OF OF OF
124. Al CO 9 OF OF CO OF A OF OF Al OF OF oj A oj oj CO OF gt A oj 9 OF oj gt A OF Al oj OF OF Al Of CO OF OF Al OF OF oj OF OF OF Al o oj oj O OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF mJ ml Al o oj o OF OJ Of gt ALO OF OF OF Al o o oj 9 o o OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 5 o OF Of CO OF A OF ALO OF OF Al OF OF OF A OF Al Al CO OF A OF Oj 9 Oj Oj OF OF OF OF O OF o Al Oj OF O Al O Al OF o OF 9 9 9 9 9 OF OF OF OF OF Oj ojoj Al OF 0 j oj oj 9 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF A oj 9 oj o 9 9 9 oj A
125. Aug 2007 4 2 Sensor layout Lower Feeder Unit pr Bi NN Dem IN gt v 8 Uu 5 K di t 5 4056F4C500DA e Registration sensor PS1 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Jam display 43 Solution 43 1 Initial check items When media misfeed occurs check the following 5 LL Check Item Action 5 Does the media meet product specifications Change the media 5 Change the media Is the media curled wavy or damp p Instruct the user in correct media storage Is a foreign object present along the media path or is the media path deformed or worn OR themedia path Are the rolls rollers dirty delormed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Are the Edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct x Set as necessary position to accommodate paper y Are the actuators operational Correct or change the defective actuator 4 3 2 Misfeed at Tray 2 paper feed section A Detection Timing Type Description Detection of mis The leading edge of the paper does not block the registration sensor PS1 even feed at tray 2 paper after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper pick up
126. Aug 2007 Auto Document Feeder Unit 5 2 Blank 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 4 Howto use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by Auto Document Feeder Unit Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The original glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out N CAUTION
127. B5 AS LETTER STARTMENT PHOTO SIZE 4x6 PHOTO SIZE 10x15 LTR 2UP SPL A4 4UP SPL A4 2UP SPL lt TRAY2 gt The default setting is 4 or LETTER 4 LETTER 102 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 11 3 N UP LAYOUT Function Sets the number of images printed on one page for camera direct photo printing Use To specify the number of camera direct photo printing images to be printed on each sheet Setting The default setting is 1 procedure 1 2 3 4 6 8 8 12 NETWORK SETTING 8 12 1 IP ADDRESS Function This function is used to specify the IP address for the copier NOTE Use Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use The default setting is AUTO AUTO SPECIFY If AUTO is selected the IP address is automatically acquired from the DHCP server Setting procedure NOTE AUTO is only enabled if there is a DHCP server available on the network When AUTO is selected there 15 no need to set the SUBNET MASK or GATEWAY setting If SPECIFY is selected the screen for entering the IP address appears 8 12 2 SUBNET MASK Function This function is used to specify the subnet mask value for the network NOTE Use Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the sub net mask to use Setting LAN connect to WAN the net mask addre
128. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be extremely hot The developing unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands lt 15 5 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 SERVICE MODE 51 SERVICE MODE eniry procedure NOTE Ensure appropriate security for the Service Mode entry procedure It should NEVER be given to any unauthorized person Auto Document Feeder Unit A Procedure 1 the initial screen press the Menu Select key to call MACHINE SETTING to the screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 051 B Exiting Press the Stop Reset key T 2 lt 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 SERVICE MODE 52 ADJUST 5 2 1 ADF SUB ZOOM Function To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when using the Aut
129. CO OF OF CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al 0 O oj OF OF OF Oj j OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF oj OF Al OF CO CO 090 090 OF OF OF CO OF OF OF O OF Al O OF 0 gt A oj oj 9 O 9 OF OF gt 9 O OF O O OF O gt O O O gt O O A A O A gt N oO OF OF Oj OF Al 9 Oj Oj OF oj OF OF A O OF OF A Al O oj oj CO S OF gt A OF OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF oo Of CO 0 CO CO OF OF Al OF OF OF OF Al OF oj oj 9 OF 9 9 9 OF 9 oj 9 o ojoj CO OF gt OF 9 oj A OF OF OF OF Al Al o oj gt OF OF OF OF Al CO CO o OF
130. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 magicolor 2590MF 4056F5C500DA No CN No Location 1 CN1 F 4 5 f lt 294 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL Auto Document Feeder Unit 2007 08 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are
131. File path 4139 VXXX A1 bin Click Update S n O Update F W Tool V3 07 File path 395 320 1 Update Exit 5 2 s 4139F2E681DA 7 Firmware updating starts UPDATE NIC F W FIRMWARE UPDATE PLEASE WAIT 4139F2E678DB 27 4 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 When Transfer Successfully message appears on the screen click OK to close the execution tool Update ZA Tool 3 07 Transfer Successfully magicolor 2590MF 4139F2E680DA 9 Confirm that FIRMWARE UPDATE message has been displayed and turn OFF ON the machine s main switch FIRMWARE UPDATE OK MACHINE POWER OFF ON 4139F2E656DB 5 2 11 Print Configuration Page to confirm the NIC Firmware Version See P 116 28 10 When firmware updating completes turn OFF ON the machine s main switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 Other 51 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked screws NOTE To prevent loose screws a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation If the sc
132. IDC sensor Is the sensor dirty YES Clean Replace the toner cartridge 8 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the PH unit after performing Replace the IDC sensor D S 5 269 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 15 Poor color reproduction A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 41381450350 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Replace the paper with new 1 Is the paper damp YES paper that has just been unwrapped Transfer belt unit 15 the terminal dirty YES Clean IDC sensor Is the sensor dirty YES Clean Replace the transfer belt unit The problem has been eliminated e Replace mp IDs sensor 4 after performing step 3 NO gt the printer control Replace the hight voltage unit D f 270 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 16 Void areas white spots A Typical faulty images Void areas White spots magicolor 2590MF 403615405100 403619405000 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 1 dent the photo conductor sur YES the drum cartridge Drum cartridge face
133. K NOTE The percent of life remaining in the toner cartridge or print unit can be used as a guide but may not exactly reflect the amount that has been used in the toner car tridge or print unit C Coverage Information The total number of pages that have been printed is counted and displayed based on the description shown in the following table Types of count Count condition Counts by converting the size outputted in color to a value corre Color Faces Printed sponding to A4 pages 1 sided A4 Counts 1 2 sided A4 Counts 2 Counts by converting the size outputted in monochrome to a value Monochrome Faces Printed corresponding to A4 pages 1 sided A4 Counts 1 2 sided A4 Counts 2 Total Total count of the above printed pages in color and monochrome D How to read consumable periodic replacement parts units counter information 2 The lower right part of the configuration page shows numerical values that represent 5 consumable periodic replacement parts units counter information The table below explains counter information that is provided by each numerical data E 1 Display on the configuration page No 1 2 13 141 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 Display 0 0 0 0 0 AW 0 0 0 O O 0 2 Meaning of counter value No Contents
134. O O O O O O Al O O 0 CO O oj oj oj Oj Oj Oj OF Oj OF O 0 0 oj ojoj CO CO Of CO CO OF OF o oj ojoj CO OF CO Of Of CO OF OF OF Of OF CO OF oj ojoj CO CO OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF S S o oo oj CO Of CO Of S OF OF OF OF Of CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF oj CO Of CO OF Of CO CO oj CO Of N oj gt CO CO gt A ojojoj gt CO CO OF OF gt ojojoj Of Of GO S S S o o oo N oO CO CO 9 O OF CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OF CO CO 0 oj ojoj Of CO OF OF A OF OF OF OF CO CO CO OF CO OF CO CO CO OF OF OF OF OF O O OF O O O O O 0 0 O
135. O OF OF OF OF OF oj OF O OF OF A Al 0 oj oj CO CO OF gt OF O OF OF 9 OF OF 9 OF S oo Of CO CO OF OF OF OF Al o ojo oj oj 9 OF 9 9 OF 9 oj 9 o o CO OF gt OF 9 OF OF OF OF Al o oj gt OF OF OF Al CO 9 OF OF CO OF gt A OF OF OF oj A oj oj CO OF 9 OF OF OF oj gt A OF Al OF OF OF CO Al Of CO CO OF OF Al OF 9 oj OF OF OF Al oj oj O OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF mJ ml Al o S CO OF OJ
136. OF OF gt Al S oo CO Oj OF OF OF OF O O O O OF O O OF OF OF Al OF OF OF Al O O 0 0 oj oj Of CO OF A OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A O OF OF OF OF CO 9 Oj OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OTN oj O OF Oj OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF O CO 090 090 OF OF Oj OF OF OF oj OF OF OF OF Al OF 0 gt ojoj 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A A oO oO OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF oj OF A OF 0 oj oj CO O OF gt OF 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF AL oo OF CO CO OF OF OF OF OF Al oO ojo oj oj 9 Of OF 9 9 OF 9 OF oj CO CO CO CO OJ Of CO OF
137. OF CO OF gt A OF OF OF oj A oj oj CO gt OF 9 OF OF gt A OF Al OF OF OF Al Of CO OF OF Al o OF OF oj OF OF OF Al 9 oj oj O OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF ml Al OF CO Of gt ALO OF OF OF A Al o oj OF A O CO OF OF Oj OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al 5 o OF OF OF CO OF A OF ALO OF Al OG OF OF A OF A OF Al Al S OTN oj OF 9 Oj OF OF OF OF OF OF OF O O 0 Oj j OF CO 9 OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF Al OF 0 oj oj A 9 OF OF A 9 OF OF OF OF oj 9 oj oj OF OF OF A OF OF A A CO oj OF OF OF OF OF Oj OF OF OF
138. PAO3DFCB 1 ON F 13 6 DFCB D 2 Q 5 27 7 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 3 4 Misfeed at the document exit section A Detection timing 55 5 Description 9 Detection of mis The paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 is not unblocked even after the 2 feed at the docu lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper feed sensor PS2 has ment exit section been unblocked Detection of paper The paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 is blocked when the power switch left atthe document is turned ON the cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is exit section reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Paper feed sensor PS2 DF control board DFCB Paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the DFCB connector for proper nection and correct as necessary PS2 sensor check DFCB PAO6DFCB 1 ON F 13 PS3 sensor check DFCB 1 ON F 13 Change DFCB f 28 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL Lower Feeder Unit 2007 08 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publica
139. Re dial attempts continue fail counter Using for detect line prob lem error 36 203 Re dial attempts fail limitation counter Using for detect line prob 4 3 2 1 lem error 8 Polling TX type for V 34 modem 7 Auto dial learning for V 34 modem 37 P 204 ep 6 5 4 RX start symbol rate for V 34 modem 3 2 1 start symbol rate for V 34 modem D 8 Fine tune of 33 6 kbps 31 2 kbps receiving speed for V 34 modem 7 Set Reset V 34 transmit level deviation 38 205 lt 6 5 V 34 flag number between ECM frame 4 Phase 2 guard tone power level V 34 V 8 34 capability 8 Disable V 34 TX for V 34 modem 7 Disable V 34 RX for V 34 modem 6 5 Flags number in FSK frame for V 34 modem 39 4 Manual TX mode for V 34 modem P 206 3 Switch from V 17 to V 34 if DIS Bit 6 set after received DIS Delay time in primary channel for V 34 transmit after CFR or MCF signal 940 8 7 6 5 17 RX start speed select receiving start speed for V 17 3 2 1 34 RX start speed prohibit V 34 mode When upper speed less 8 7 6 5 17 TX start speed select receiving start speed for V 17 2 1 41 208 3 2 1 34 TX start speed prohibit V 34 mode when upper speed less 42 Reserved P 209 43 Reserved P 209 151 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 E Soft Switch No Bit No Design
140. Use utmost care when handling tools on the user s premises SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on in the machine When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock AXCAUTION AVORSICHT A ATTENTION A PRECAUCION NCUIDADO A ATTENZIONE High Temperature Oberfiicha Terap ratura lev s aita temperatura Alta tamporstura A High temperature mim CQ SN MJEUKMBM922H 0 G 4139P0E504DA S 18 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4139POE505DA CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our Service Office S 19 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1 If an accident has occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage 2 Ifa report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evalua tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified 3 To determine
141. and CCD MAIN ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjust the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern so that the follow ing specification is met 0 2 0 Adjustment Specifica B tion A 4139F3C546DA Adjustment 5 0 5 0 mm 0 0 0 0 mm 5 0 5 0 mm Range Step 0 5 mm 1 Print the test pattern See P 137 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select CCD MAIN REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass and make a test NOTE Setting The test pattern should be positioned vertically Procedure Use 4 Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 6 Press the Menu Select key 7 Using the key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 8 Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass Then make a test copy again and check it Adjustment If the width of A is less than the width of B Increase the setting Instructions If the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting 130 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 46 SUB REGIST Function To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying th
142. any of the red painted screws in the field It should also be noted that when two or more screws are used for a single part only one repre sentative screw may be marked with the red paint C Variable resistors on board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given Adjustment Setting 5 2 D Removal of PWBs N CAUTION When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 32 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list Auto Document Feeder Unit No Section Part name Ref Page 1 Paper feed roller P6 2 Rollers Pick up roller RT 3 Unit Auto Document Feeder Unit P8 4 Top cover P9 5 Exterior parts Rear cover P9 6 Document feeder tray P 10 7 and etc DF control board P 10 8 Other part Main motor 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list No Section Part name Ref Page 1 Paper feed roller B Rollers Pick u
143. been eliminated NO Replace the toner cartridge Replace the hight voltage unit 266 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 12 Low image density A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 403616403600 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean 2 unit Is the window surface dirty YES Clean Is the contact on the rail of the 3 transfer belt unit in good contact NO or correct contact Transfer belt unit with the mating part 4 Is the contact dirty YES Clean 5 2ndtransfer roller 15 the terminal dirty YES Clean Replace the paper with new 6 Paper Is the paper damp YES paper that has just been unwrapped 7 IDC sensor Is the sensor dirty YES Clean Replace the toner cartridge Replace the transfer belt unit Replace the 2nd transfer roller The problem has been eliminated Replace the PH unit after performing step 7 Replace the IDC sensor Replace the printer control board Replace the hight voltage unit S 5 267 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 213 Gradation reproduction failure A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF D 403619404800 403616404900
144. belt unit 5 Is the terminal dirty YES Clean 6 ls the 2nd transfer roller dirty or YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller scratched The problem has been eliminated Replace the toner cartridge 7 after performing step 6 gt Replace the PH unit B SEP 9 Replace the hight voltage unit D 2 5 265 magicolor 2590MF D E 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 11 Uneven density in CD A Typical faulty images Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 403615404600 403616404700 Troubleshooting procedure after performing step 7 Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 i dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge Drum cartridge face 2 Is the outside dirty YES Clean Is the contact on the rail of the 3 transfer belt unit in good contact NO Check or correct contact with the mating part 4 Is the transfer belt dirty with fin YES Clean gerprints or oil Transfer belt unit I Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 5 Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer belt with a new transfer belt unit 6 Is the terminal dirty YES Clean 7 1s ing 2nd transterirollgr any or YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller scratched 8 l The problem has
145. board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 1 Check the PRCB connector for proper con _ nection and correct as necessary 2 54 sensor check PRCB PJ9PRCB 8 ON C 5 3 Change transfer belt unit 4 PRCB 247 magicolor 2590MF S Q 5 15 Error codes Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 411 17H Rack rotation failure Relevant Electrical Parts Rack motor M2 Printer control board PRCB Rack positioning sensor PS3 magicolor 2590MF WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electrical component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the M2 connector for proper connec ES _ tion and correct as necessary Check M2 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 4 PS3 sensor check PRCB PJ5PRCB 11 ON C 6 PRCB PJ5PRCB 1 to 4 Pulse Output 6 PRCB 5 2 operation check C 6 15 4 12 18H Heating roller warm up failure 15 4 13 19H Abnormally low heating roller temperature 15 4 14 Abnormally high heating roller temperature 15 4 15 1BH Faulty thermistor Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing unit Printer control board PRCB DC power supply1 DCPU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Locat
146. check PRCB PJ12PRCB 3 ON Jto K 2 4 PS8 sensor check PRCB PJ14PRCB 6 ON J to K 3 5 1502 operation check PRCB PJ11PRCB 4 REM J to K 1 6 PRCB D f 236 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 14 Jam display 14 3 4 Misfeed at fusing section A Detection timing Type Description The paper does not block the exit sensor PS7 even after the lapse of a predeter mined period of time after the registration roller solenoid SD2 has been ener Detection of gized misfeed at fusing The exit sensor PS7 is unblocked within a predetermined period of time after it section has been blocked by the paper magicolor 2590MF The main motor polygon motor and rack motor are energized even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after paper information has been created Detection of paper The exit sensor PS7 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON a cover is left in fusing section opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit sensor PS7 Printer control board PRCB Registration roller solenoid SD2 Image processing board IPB WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i i p Control Signal Location Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the IPB connector for proper con u nection and correct as n
147. checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The original glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out N CAUTION Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be extremely hot The developing unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands
148. cycle tion ntity Page Toner cartridge K about 4 500 pages 1 1 P 13 Shipped with printer Y about 1 500 pages 5 Toner cartridge about 4 500 pages 2 1 pts For replacement Y M C about 1 500 pages Standard print about 18 000 pages Processing section Mono about 45 000 pages chrome 3 Drum cartridge 1 1P J about 15 000 pages 16 Contiriusus about 11 250 pages Color print 1P J about 7 500 pages 1 Printed by 3 pages job for monochrome and 2 pages job for color 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 B Parts to be replaced by service engineers FRUs S No Qua Replacement cycle Ret cation ntity Page 5 8 Standard print 000 pages o E Continuous print about 195 009 Mono pages chrome 1 image Transfer belt unit 1 2004145 0 47 transfer pages section about 33 700 Continuous print pages bout 22 500 pages 2 2nd transfer roller 1 about 120 000 prints P 18 Eusing unit 1 about 120 000 prints P 20 section Auto Doc See P 3 of the Auto Docu 8 4 Separator pad 1 50 000 ment Feeder Unit service 5 Unit manual 41 Printed pages job for monochrome 2 pages job for color 3 1 2 Cleaning parts A Parts to be clean
149. fluctuation of 20 or less per hour G Print functions Type Built in type controller for Windows Pentium 11 400MHz or higher Personal computer for Macintosh PowerPC G3 or later G4 or later is recommended Intel processor Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows 2000 Windows Vista 32 bit 64 bit System requirements Mac OS X 10 2 8 or later We recommend install ing the latest patch Free hard disk space 256 or more RAM 128 MB or more 10Base T 100Base TX IEEE 802 3 Ethernet interface port USB Revision 2 0 and USB Revision 1 1 compliant port The Ethernet cable and USB cable are not included with the machine Operating System interface NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Product specifications 21 Fax specifications 8 Standard 203 dpi x 98 dpi D Resolution Fine 203 dpi x 196 dpi 5 Super fine 203 dpi x 392 dpi 8 Standard Fine Super fine Halftone level Half tone standard Half tone fine Half tone super fine Receive Supported Automatic reduction Transmit Not supported Compatibility ECM Super G3 Modem speed V 34 up to 33 6 Kbps Transmit speed 3 second page at V 34 Compression MH MR MMR JBI
150. having enough cur rent capacity and the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock Attach power plug which meets the following criteria having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect ing to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity grounding and may result in fire or electric shock Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter minals of the plug according to the following order Black or Brown L line e White or Light Blue N neutral Green Yellow PE earth Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product and results in fire or electric shock S 3 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and customer engi neer hereafter called the CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks
151. into pages 990 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Oficio Less than 331 mm 1 page eu 332 mm to 654 mm Divide into 2 pages 655 mm to 977 mm Divide into 3 pages 978 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more 3 Cut mode The data that is larger than 1 page record area is cut and not recorded to 24 mm paper sie Printing Less than 289 mm 1 page 290 mm to 313 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 314 mm to 570 mm Divide into 2 pages ORF 571 mm to 594 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 595 mm to 851 mm Divide into pages 852 mm or more Divide into pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 285 mm 1 page 286 mm to 309 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 310 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages ON 563 mm to 586 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 587 mm to 839 mm Divide into pages 840 mm or more Divide into pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 271 mm 1 page 272 mm to 295 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 296 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages ORF 535 mm to 558 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 559 mm to 797 mm Divide into pages TM 798 mm or more Divide into pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 267 mm 1 page 268 mm to 291 mm Print into 1 page
152. let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion 67 Handling of Service Materials CAUTION Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet A gt Drum cleaner isopropyl alcohol and roller cleaner ace tone based are highly flammable and must be handled lt with care A risk of fire exists Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully 3 evaporated Q A risk of fire exists 5 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off A risk of fire exists When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort N Q ze GE SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4 Laser Safety This is a digital machine certified as a class 1 laser product There is no possibility of danger from a laser provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual 41 Internal Laser Radiation
153. mm to 851 mm Divide into 3 pages 852 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 285 mm 1 page 286 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages ON 563 mm to 839 mm Divide into 3 pages 840 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Letter Less than 271 mm 1 page OFF 272 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages 535 mm to 797 mm Divide into 3 pages 798 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 267 mm 1 page ON 268 mm to 526 mm Divide into 2 pages 527 mm to 785 mm Divide into 3 pages 786 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Legal Less than 348 mm 1 page OFF 349 mm to 688 mm Divide into 2 pages 689 mm to 1 028 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 029 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 344 mm 1 page ON 345 mm to 680 mm Divide into 2 pages 681 mm to 1 016 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 017 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more 95 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T O lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Recording Foot Length of Printing paper size received image Less than 335 1 GEE 356 mm to 662 mm Divide into 2 pages 663 mm to 989 mm
154. oj CO O OF gt OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF oo Of CO CO OF OF OF OF OF Al o OF oj oj 9 Of OF 9 9 OF 9 OF oj S CO Of ojoj CO OF gt OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Al Al o oj gt A OF OF OF OF Al o CO OF OF CO OF gt A OF OF OF OF A oj CO CO OF gt OF OF OF oj gt A OF Al OF OF CO Al CO OF OF ALO OF OF OF OF OF Al oj oj O OF Oj OF OF CO 9 OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF ml S o S S OF OJ Of OF OF gt ALO OF OF OF Al Al
155. or 5 PH unit nal of the PH unit connected NO erly reconnect the connector Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 6 Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer Transfer belt unit belt with a new transfer belt unit 15 the 2nd transfer roller dirty or 8 7 scratched YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller 15 there a foreign object in the 8 9 YES the foreign object paper path 9 Is the fusing entrance guide plate YES Clean Fusing unit dirty or scratched 10 15 the separation claw dirty YES Replace the fusing unit The problem has been eliminated 11 after performing step 10 NO Replace the DC power supply1 264 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 10 Uneven density in FD A Typical faulty images 40361404300 40361040440 403616404500 magicolor 2590MF B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge Drum cartridge face Is the outside dirty YES Clean PH unit Is the window surface dirty YES Clean Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 4 Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer Transfer belt unit belt with a new transfer
156. or drive original failure Offset master Feed failure Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet Less than 0 05 mm thick thin paper Misfeed More than 0 15 mm thick thin paper Misfeed emm I9 S lt Feeder Unit 1 Product Specifications E Paper feed not guaranteed originals Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 If fed paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible Type of original Possible trouble Sheets lightly curled Curled amount 10 15 mm Dog eared exit failure Heat sensitive paper Edge folded exit failure transport failure Translucent paper Take up failure transport failure Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Take up failure transport failure Paper with many punched holes e g loose leaf limited to vertical feeding Multi page feed due to flashes from holes Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure Sheets two folded or Z folded Transport failure image deformation Sheets folded Image deformation multi page feed take up failure F Machine specifications Power requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit DC 5 V supplied from the main unit Max power consumption 30 W 518 W x 350 1 D x 90 3 H mm Dimensions 20 5 W x 13 75 D x 3 5 H inch Weight 3 2 kg 7 Ib G Operating Conforms to the opera
157. panel operation Use have not been made for a given period Setting The default setting is ON procedure OFF 125 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T O lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 4 ADJUST 11 4 1 MAIN REGIST Function To vary and adjust the print start position in the main scanning direction Use Ifthe image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced Adjust the amount that widths and B in the printed test pattern are shifted so that the following specification is met 0 2 0 mm Adjustment Specification B A 4139F3C546DA Adjustment 4 0 4 0 mm 0 0 0 0 mm 4 0 4 0 mm Range Step 0 1 mm 1 Print the test pattern1 See P 137 2 Check the amount that widths A and B in the test pattern1 are shifted Setting If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure Procedure 3 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 4 Select PRN MAIN REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key twice 5 Using the A V key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 6 Print a test pattern1 again and check it Adjustment If the width of A is less than the width of B
158. procedure Periodic parts check 3 3 jul E 4 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items sene 4 3 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list 5 3 3 Disassembly Assembly 5 3 3 1 Paper pick up roller eese eene eene netten nennen nnne 5 3 3 2 Lower Feeder Unit 6 3 3 3 uc c 6 3 3 4 Rear COVEN 7 3 3 5 7 3 3 6 PF drive board PFDB u 8 3 3 7 Paper pick up Solenoid 501 9 3 3 8 Tray set detecting switch 10 34 Cleaning procedure 3 4 1 Paper pick up roller 5 retinent eterne 10 Troubleshooting 4 SEMI 11 41 Misfeedidisplay 11 4 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 11 4 2 SONSON layOUl acce ceteri ci eet 12 4 3 Solution 4 3 1 Initial check items tnter tnt nnn riae nto nnno irn th 13 4 3 2 Misfeed at Tray 2 paper feed section 13 Lower Feeder Unit 7 2 Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 J
159. ring P 220 62 P 221 8 key definition in PBX mode 63 221 1 TX Result report with image 6 Print RX error report In RX side if no any FAX signal detected 64 222 5 10 PPS amp 20 PPS Selectable by User 152 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 2 3 Default soft switch setting for each market area A Market area 1 Marketing area U S A United Kingdom Argentina Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit 4 4 gt ralia Soft Switch No z magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 lt lt 0 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF GO OF OF Of A OF gt gt O oO oO OF Of A OF OF OF Of OC CO OC OO 0 OF OF OF OF gt OJ OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A OC gt CO OF OF Of A Alo OF OF OF
160. set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 35 SOFT SWITCH 35 gt ES Initial N 5 Bit Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 8 Dial tone table switch Time ims 300 1000 2099 time Bit No 8 0 0 1 1 7 Bit No 7 0 1 U 1 0 A 6 1 pg Pial tone frequency See Bit No 1 to 3 0 upper range index 0 3 0 Frequency T 310 to 380 462 to 580 range Hz Bit No 3 0 0 2 Bit No 2 0 1 0 Dial tone frequency Bit No 1 1 0 0 low range index reduency 570 to 630 300 0 370 Reserved range Hz 1 Bit No 3 0 1 1 1 1 0 Bit No 2 1 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 1 0 1 0 1 2 lt 202 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 36 SOFT SWITCH 36 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX Re dial attempts con 0 No any limitation tinue fail counter 8 1 Using for detect problem error 8 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 0 4 Counter 0111213141516 7 1 Bit No 4 Bit No 3 4 1 1 1 3 i 0 Re dial attempts fail Bit No 2 DETE I 0 911 1 limitation counter Bit No 1 1 Using for detect line A
161. signal Time T 400 ms T 500 600 700 ms Bit No 5 1 1 1 1 Bit No 4 0 0 1 1 6 Bit No 3 0 1 0 1 2 7 5 20 sec T5 40 5 60 0 Inactivity timer T5 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 5 60 5 sec in ITU T standard 188 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 18 SOFT SWITCH 18 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 Reserved Reserved 6 G3 mode training Definition Level2 Level3 Level4 0 0 quality level Pit No 6 0 1 1 5 Bit 5 1 0 1 0 4 Counter 112 13141516171819 10 0 reaa BtNo 4 o 0 BitNo 3 BitNo 2 uo 11 111 0 0 1 9 SW20 1 to 5 BitNo 1 fo 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 Machine doesn t refer Counter Reserved 0 This setting BitNo 4 11111111 Kept refer SW8 1 to 3 0 1 1 1 1 41 setting BitNo 2 1 0 0 1 1 0 BitNo 1 14011101 Bit 1 to 4 The re dial time will followings bit 1 to 4 if these bits not all clear Otherwise the re dial time will followings bit 1 to 4 on SWO8 Bit 5 6 Level 1 training check phases are not so severe than level 2 3 4 Level 2 3 4 can keep higher RX sp
162. solenoid feed section SD1 has been energized B Action Relevant electrical parts Registration sensor PS1 Printer control board PRCB Paper pick up solenoid 501 5 5 WIRING DIAGRAM 3 Step Action Location Electrical A Control signal component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the PRCB connector for proper con _ _ nection and correct as necessary 3 PS1 sensor check PRCB PJ12PRCB 3 ON J to K 2 4 501 operation check PFDB PJ22PFDB 2 REM F 4 5 PRCB 13 4 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Lower Feeder Unit Blank Page D fe ES c a 5 14 p m E lt KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL Duplex Option 2007 08 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times th
163. specify the starting time or ending time of memory reception or to cancel the function The set starting time and ending time are valid every day until memory reception is turned off A The default setting is OFF ON Enable memory RX mode OFF Disable memory RX mode 8 7 2 NO of RINGS Function This function can be used to set the number of rings between 1 and 16 until the call is Use answered The default setting is 2 Depend on soft switch setting of marketing area Setting procedure 1 Once 2 Twice 3 3times 4 4times 5 5times 6 6 times 7 7times 8 8times 9 9 times 10 10 times 11 11 times 12 12 times 13 13 times 14 14 times 15 15 times 16 16 times 8 7 3 REDUCTION RX Function This function can be used to set whether documents longer than the paper are printed reduced ON split OFF or discarded CUT However when sending a document Use more than 24 mm 1 inch longer than the paper CUT is not available In this case the document is split The default setting is ON Setting ON Reduction print mode procedure OFF 100 RX mode CUT Cut mode 93 magicolor 2590MF E lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 8 Menu mode 1 Reduction print mode It reduces only the FD direction and prints so that receiving data will a recording paper Field Service Ver 1
164. the cause of the accident conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT 4 Forreports and measures concerning serious accidents follow the regulations speci fied by every distributor S 20 Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options Theory of Operation section gives as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product a rough outline of the object and role of each function the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system and the timing of operation of each part Field Service section gives as information required by the CE at the site or at the cus tomer s premise a rough outline of the service schedule and its details maintenance steps the object and role of each adjustment error codes and supplementary information The basic configuration of each section is as follows However some options may not be applied to the following configuration lt Theory of Operation section gt OUTLINE Explanation of system configuration product specifications unit configuration and paper path COMPOSITION OPERATION Explanation of configuration of each unit operating system and control system lt Field service section gt GENERAL Explanation of system configuration and produ
165. the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE Setting e The test pattern1 should be positioned vertically Procedure 17 Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 6 Press the Menu Select key 7 Using the key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 8 Place the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder Then make a test copy again and check it Adjustment e If the width of A is less than the width of B Increase the setting Instructions e f the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 SERVICE MODE 5 2 3 ADF SUB REGIST To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by Function varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder When the original glass is replaced When new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjust the width of in the copy of the test pattern1 so that the follo
166. tridge is detected 24H Faulty fusing thermistor The heater lamp remains ON for a predetermined con resistor secutive period of time 29H 2AH Trouble related to security 7 Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOLTA 2BH y when not returning in power switch OFF ON 2CH Re write the controller firmware 2DH Trouble related to security Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOLTA when not returning in power switch OFF ON The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for predeter IR cooling fan motor mal 31H mined consecutive period of time while the cooling fan function motor remains energized A low motor lock signal is not detected even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the scan ner motor has been started 101H Scanner motor malfunction The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter mined consecutive period of time while the scanner motor remains energized The intensity of the light emitted from the exposure 1021 Faulty ir exposure lamp lamp of the scanner falls short of the specified value FOH Trouble related to security ENGINE Communication error Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOLTA INTERFACE between engine controller before taking some countermeasures CONTROLLER Controller internal error 15 3 How to reset To reset the printer after a malfunction has occurred turn the power switch OFF and then ON again 242 Fie
167. 0 178 Bit 3 The duration of alarm last 3 second after detect negative signal in G3 mode Bit 4 The display message will keep on LCD 3 seconds or until next incoming T30 signal Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 5 SOFT SWITCH 05 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX magicolor 2590MF 8 Timing 70 ON 90 0 Push Button ON OFF ms 42241 140 90 Timing PB Bit No 8 0 1 1 Bit No 7 0 0 1 1 2 5 6 Reserved Relation between 10 key amp No of dial pulse 7 8 9 CO N P N oOo oO 59 Bit No 6 Bit No 5 alo a o ala 4 PPS 20 20 20 Reserved 16 16 16 Reseed 1 MR 33 40 30 33 40 30 Bit No 4 3 Bit No 3 Bit No 2 Bit No 1 S 72 lt S O ojo ajaloo oj o a Dial pulse make ratio select adjust MR PPS ED 10 10 10 MR lt lt 40 30 32 Bit No 4 Bit No 7 Bit No 21 Bit No 187 Reserved j O x
168. 0 Bit No 8 0 3 5 Bit No 7 0 Signal tone Insensitiv ity dBm After dial for busy tone Level dBm EN o Bit No 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No _ N OJ OJ Bit No oj OJ OJ O O oo 4 oj OC OJ O gt O 0 oj CO o Level dBm 11 EN wo 1 T a 1 1 os 3 A E Bit No 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No N Bit No olo oj oj oj o of a ojoj o Level dBm 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Bit No 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No N oO Bit No al O Level dBm 31 38 39 Bit No 6 Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No A Bit No oj 9 oj of Level dBm 41 to 50 Bit No 6 1 Setting disable 199 magicolor 2590MF
169. 0 Not to check Regard dial tone as 1 Yes Check dial tone after dialing 0 busy tone after dialing 0 Check busy tone 0 Measure tone by input energy over threshold method 1 By PTT regulation tone frequency 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 0 BitNo 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BitNo 3 0 0 0 1 1 1 3 BitNo 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 CED signal output Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 level 2 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 BitNo 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BitNo 3 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 BitNo 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 12 3 23 SOFT SWITCH 23 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 193 magicolor 2590MF D S 72 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 24 SOFT SWITCH 24 ape m Initial Bit Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 25 SOFT SWITCH 25 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 Reserved Reserved 0 6 0 5 0 2 4 i 0 Flash key time in ON mah time ms 100 80 60 50
170. 000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 45 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 0001040 100040 140 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 172 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set K Market area 11 Marketing area Turkey Vietnam Bit No Bit No 4 4 Soft Switch No magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
171. 000 00000000 45 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 o000000 00000000 0 0000000 000000000 48 00010101100010101000101010001010 1 49 10000000100000000110000010000000 50 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 51 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 52 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 53 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 166 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set H Market area 8 Marketing area Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 4 Soft Switch No magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 E lt
172. 0000 0050 00000000 0061 00000000 0082 00000000 0003 00000000 0004 00000000 0005 00000000 0006 00000000 0007 00000000 0008 00000000 0009 00000000 00DA 00000000 00DB 00000000 0006 00000000 0000 00000000 OODE 00000000 00DF 00000000 0060 00000000 00E1 00000000 00E2 00000000 00E3 00000000 00E4 00000000 00E5 00000000 00E6 00000000 00E7 00000000 00E8 00000000 00 9 00000000 OOEA 00000000 00 00000000 00 00000000 00 0 00000000 00 00000000 OOEF 00000000 00 0 00000000 OOF1 00000000 0062 00000000 00F3 00000000 00 4 00000000 00 5 00000000 00 6 00000000 0067 00000000 00 8 00000000 OOF 00000000 00000000 00 00000000 00000000 00 0 00000000 OOFE 00000006 OOFF 00000002 4139F3E530DA 143 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 9 3 1 30 PROTOCOL LIST Function Print out T 30 or V8 protocol after communication SESSION Session number FUNCTION Function Name DESTINATION STATION Destination Name Tel No DATE TIME Communication Date amp Time PAGE Total page number for this session MODE Communication speed and ECM mode RESULT Communication result TX T 30 command sent by local Fax RX T 30 command received from remote Fax DATA T 30 frame that include address amp control amp Data Enter the SERVICE MODE 2 Select REPORT and press the Menu Select key 3 Select T 30 PROTOCOL LIST and press the Menu Select key magicolor 2590MF Setting proc
173. 0000 7 2K 000000 2 4K 000007 JBIG RX TIME 000000 FAX PRINT 000000 PC PRINT PRN SUB REGIST CCD SUB ZOOM 0 CCD SUB REGIST 1 0 ADF SUB ZOOM 0 01 03 00 00 00 89 80 10 4139F2E541DA 141 magicolor 2590MF S N lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 ERROR LOG HISTORY LIST example z The following table is the error log history The table keeps the last 40 records only 5 wo N 5 ERROR LOG HISTORY LIST 8 5 Index Error Maker Tele 0001 00A0 4230 88634733507 0002 00A0 49EE 0003 0070 0000 0004 0070 0000 0005 0070 0000 0006 0070 0000 0007 0070 0000 0008 0070 0000 0009 0070 0000 123 NSF signal 3rd and 4th byte Keep 20 digits of TSI or CSI 4139F3E552DA T 2 lt 142 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 9 2 ERROR CODE LIST Function m Print error code CODE and error occurrence time ERROR TIMES Use 5 Settina 1 Enter the SERVICE MODE Oo un m 2 Select REPORT and press the Menu Select key 9 P 3 Select ERROR CODE LIST and press the Menu Select key 1 ERROR CODE TABLE example ERROR CODE TABLE CODE ERROR TIMES CODE ERROR TIMES CODE ERROR TIMES 0001 00000000 0002 00000000 0003 00000000 0004
174. 0000000 0062 00000000 0060 00000000 006E 00000000 006F 00000000 m 0070 00000002 0071 00000000 0072 00000008 5 0073 00000000 0074 00000000 0075 00000000 0076 00000000 0077 00000000 0078 00000017 0079 00000000 007 00000000 0078 00000000 2 007 00000000 0070 00000000 007 00000000 007F 00000000 0080 00000000 0081 00000000 0082 00000000 0083 00000001 0084 00000000 2 0085 00000000 0086 00000000 0087 00000000 0088 00000000 0089 00000000 008A 00000000 008B 00000000 008C 00000000 008D 00000000 008E 00000000 008F 00000000 0090 00000000 0091 00000001 0092 00000000 0093 00000000 0094 00000000 0095 00000000 0096 00000000 0097 00000000 0098 00000000 0099 00000000 00000000 0098 00000000 0092 00000000 0090 00000000 009E 00000000 009F 00000000 00A0 00000024 00 1 00000000 0042 00000000 00A3 00004558 00A4 00000002 00 5 00000000 00A6 00000000 00A7 00000006 00 8 00000000 0049 00000001 00000000 00000000 00AC 00000000 00AD 00000000 00000000 00 00000000 0080 00000000 0081 00000000 0082 00000000 0083 00000000 0084 00000000 0085 00000000 0086 00000000 0087 00000000 0088 00000000 0089 00000000 00000000 00BB 00000000 00 00000000 0080 00000000 00 00000000 00 00000000 00 0 00000000 00 1 00000000 00C2 00000000 00C3 00000000 0064 00000000 0065 00000000 0066 00000000 0067 00000000 0068 00000000 0069 00000000 00000000 00CB 00000000 00 00000000 0060 00000000 00CE 00000000 0000
175. 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010000 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 0001040 100040 140 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 158 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 D Market area 4 12 SOFT SWITCH set Soft Switch No Marketing area Finland France Germany Greece Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
176. 00000000 0005 00000000 0006 00000000 0007 00000000 0008 00000000 0009 00000000 000 00000000 0008 00000000 000C 00000000 000D 00000000 000E 00000000 000F 00000000 0010 00000000 0011 00000000 0012 00000000 0013 00000000 0014 00000000 0015 00000000 0016 00000000 0017 00000000 0018 00000000 0019 00000000 001 00000000 0018 00000000 0012 00000000 0010 00000000 001 00000000 001 00000000 0020 00000000 0021 00000000 0022 00000000 0023 00000000 0024 00000000 0025 00000000 0026 00000000 0027 00000000 0028 00000000 0029 00000000 002 00000000 0028 00000000 0022 00000000 0020 00000000 002E 00000000 002F 00000000 0030 00000000 0031 00000000 0032 00000000 0033 00000000 0034 00000000 0035 00000000 0036 00000000 0037 00000000 0038 00000000 0039 00000000 003A 00000000 003B 00000000 003 00000000 0030 00000000 003 00000000 003F 00000000 0040 00000000 0041 00000000 0042 00000000 0043 00000000 0044 00000000 0045 00000000 0046 00000000 0047 00000000 0048 00000000 0049 00000000 004 00000000 0048 00000000 004C 00000000 004D 00000000 004 00000000 004 00000000 0050 00000000 0051 00000000 0052 00000000 0053 00000000 0054 00000000 0055 00000000 0056 00000000 0057 00000000 0058 00000000 0059 00000000 005A 00000000 005B 00000000 005C 00000000 005D 00000000 o 005 00000000 005 00000000 0060 00000000 E 0061 00000000 0062 00000000 0063 00000000 0064 00000000 0065 00000000 0066 00000000 0067 00000000 0068 00000000 0069 00000000 7 006A 00000000 006B 0
177. 0099 Remote side disconnect after primary channel 009A Did not detect any signal after sending Cl signal 009C Received DCN after sending DTC in V 34 polling RX 009D Remote side hang up before V 34 modem enters phase 2 state in V 34 polling RX OO9F Did not receive any response from other side after sending PPS EOM signal User stops or cancels transmission job 00A1 Document JAM during transmission OOAE Did not finish V 8 procedure or detect V 21 signal after CM signal within 30 seconds OOAF Modem can not enter into control channel after TX side sends out RCP signal for V 34 00BO Did not receive any command after our side retry three DCS signal in V 34 TX 00B1 Did not finish V 8 procedure or detect V 21 signal after ANSam signal within 35 seconds 0082 Did not detect phase 2 signal after our side sending CJ signal within 30 seconds 00B3 Did not detect correct V 21 or JM signal after sending CM signal 00B4 Did not detect correct phase 2 signal within 25 second after CM JM signal exchange 0085 Did not detect phase signal after phase 2 within 25 seconds 0086 Did not detect phase 4 signal within 25 seconds after CM JM exchange 00B7 Did not detect phase 5 signal after phase 4 within 30 seconds 0088 Remote side disconnect after our side sent DCS signal in V 34 0089 Receive T 30 signal other than DIS DCS CFR after sending DCS signal V 34 OOBA Did not receive correct signal after our side sent DTC signal V
178. 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 8 Tray set detecting switch SW1 1 Remove the paper pick up unit See P 7 2 Unlock two tabs 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the tray set detecting switch 3 Lower Feeder Unit 4056F2C513DB 34 Cleaning procedure NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure is isopropyl alcohol 5 2 3 4 1 Paper pick up roller 1 Remove the Lower Feeder Unit from the main body See 2 Wipe the paper pick up rollers 1 clean of dirt using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol 4056F2C500DA 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Jam display Troubleshooting 4 Jam display 41 Misfeed display Lower Feeder Unit When a media misfeed occurs the printer shows the corresponding media misfeed sta tus by means of the Error indicator on the control panel or LCD display CAUTION PAPER MISFEED CAUTION OPEN FRONT COVER Error 4139F4E510DA Display Misfeed location Action location CAUTION PAPERMISEEED Tray 2 paper feed sec tion Tray 2 P 13 CAUTION OPEN FRONT COVER 4 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding cover clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the cover 92 5 11 4 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0
179. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut e 292 mm to 526 mm Divide into 2 pages 527 mm to 550 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 551 mm to 785 mm Divide into 3 pages 786 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 96 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode e nets Less than 347 mm 1 page 348 mm to 371 mm into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 372 mm to 686 mm Divide into 2 pages is 687 mm to 710 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 711 mm to 1 025 mm Divide into 3 pages Legal 1 026 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 343 mm 1 page 344 mm to 367 mm into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 368 mm to 678 mm Divide into 2 pages m 679 mm to 702 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 703 mm to 1 013 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 014 mm or more Divide into pages or 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 335 mm 1 page 336 mm to 359 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 360 mm to 662 mm Divide into 2 pages RE 663 mm to 686 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 687 mm to 989 mm Divide into pages ond 990 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 331 mm 1 332
180. 2 problem error Counter 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 1 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 0 11 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 1 1 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 8 The re dial fail counter will plus 1 for each auto dialing unless user interruption or after finish communication If the counter over the setting in bit 1 to 4 and Bit set to 1 then the machine will stop to dial unless user interruption or entry communica tion phase 203 magicolor 2590MF 72 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 37 SOFT SWITCH 37 5 Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX Polling TXtypefor V 34 modem 1 V 17 7 Auto dial learning for V 34 modem 1 No retry from V 8 handshake 6 0 RX start symbol rate ior V34 modem See Bit No 1 to 3 0 4 0 Symbol rate 3200 3000 2800 2400 3 sym s 0 Max speed 31 2 264 240 216 kbps Bit No 6 0 0 0 0 1 2 TX start symbol rate Bit No 5 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 for V 34 modem Bit No 4 0 1 0 2 5 ymbol Reserved Max speed Bit No 6 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 1 0 Bit No 4 1 0 1 T lt 204 Field Service Ve
181. 2 0 1 0 222 Bit 6 If this bit set to 1 Machine does not print put RX error report if no detect any Fax signal from the other party Bit 5 Can not open by user to change PPS if this bit set to 0 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Fax Protocols 13 Fax Protocols 13 1 G3 ECM G3 Error Correction Mode G3 ECM is the error correction system newly recommended by consultative committee of International telephone amp telegraph of 1988 By G3 ECM documents are divided into blocks called partial page for transmission If any error takes place in any frame one partial page consists of 256 frames on a partial page the receiving party generates the retransmit request with erroneous frame num bers Here is an example where frame 1 and frame 3 are subjected to error magicolor 2590MF Transmission Receiving Frame 0 N Frame 1 x Error Frame 2 Note lf one page end and Partial page consists of plural num High speed Modem Sig Frame 3 x ber of partial pages nal PPS NULL signal is trans mitted from the trans mission side Frame 255 S PPS EOP Partial page end and End gi procedure 300 dps Modem Signal PPR Re transmit request MCF E is repeated if there is no l error 2 Re transmission for error Frame 1 D High speed modem Sig Re transmission nal Frame 3 PPS EOP Partial page end 300 dps Modem Signal
182. 2PRCB 3 ON Jto K 2 4 SD1 operation check PRCB PJ18PRCB 18 REM K 4 5 Change PRCB 235 magicolor 2590MF S Q 5 14 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 14 3 3 Misfeed at 2nd transfer section A Detection timing Type Description The paper does not unblock the registration sensor PS1 even after the lapse of a Detection of mis _ predetermined period of time after the registration roller solenoid 502 has been feed at 2ndtrans deenergized fer section The fusing paper loop sensor PS8 is not blocked by the paper that has moved past the position at which the sensor is blocked The registration sensor PS1 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON a cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset magicolor 2590MF Detection of paper left in 2nd transfer section The fusing paper loop sensor PS8 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON a cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration sensor PS1 Printer control board PRCB Fusing paper loop sensor PS8 Registration roller solenoid SD2 WIRING DIAGRAM Acuan Control Signal 1 Initial check items 2 Check the PRCB connector for proper con u E nection and correct as necessary 3 PS1 sensor
183. 3 3 6 2nd transfer 18 3 3 7 20 4 Firmware pgrade irte 25 41 Controller firmware upgrading uu 25 4 1 1 Preparations for firmware upgrading 25 4 1 2 Upgrading procedure 25 4 2 firmware 27 4 2 1 Preparations for firmware upgrading esee 27 4 2 2 Upgrading procedure U tte ehe 27 5 jum 29 51 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 29 5 2 Disassembly assembly list other parts 30 5 3 Disassembly Assembly 31 5 3 1 COVEN 31 5 3 2 M 31 5 8 3 Kpgeecle m 32 5 3 4 ise 32 magicolor 2590MF Maintenance 25 lt Troubleshooting Appendix magicolor 2590MF T 2
184. 38 Inlet assy 4139F2C514DA 2 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit 5 Other 1 the lever 1 and swing open the IR unit 2 NOTE Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position See 8 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual 3 Remove the IR unit See P 50 4139F2C529DA 4 Remove the screw 1 and the top left cover 2 77 magicolor 2590MF i gt 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Remove the screw 1 6 Remove two saddles 2 and discon nect two connectors 3 Then remove the DC power supply 2 pro tective cover 4 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C533DA 1 7 Remove the screw 1 8 Disconnect four connectors 2 and remove the Power Switch 3 NOTE At reinstallation make sure of the correct position of each connector 5 2 Color of connector Color of harness 1 White Black 2 Red Black 3 White White 4 Red White 4139F2C534DA 9 Remove three saddles 1 and free the harness 4139F2C535DA 78 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F2C662DA 4139F2C537DA 5 Other 10 Remove three screws 1 and the NCU board 2 Then remove the protection film 3 NOTE Make sur
185. 4 4 Soft Switch No S z magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 lt CO Of Of OF OF gt OF OF OF OF oj oj oj gt CO S O OF Al oj CO OF Al OF OF CO Al oj CO Of CO OF OF Al 9 oj OF OF OF Al oj oj OC CO OF 9 OF OF OF gt Al o 9 OF OF OF Al CO O CO OF OF OF OF OF O OF OF OF 0 0 OF Of CO OF gt OF Al Al OF OF OF OF OF A A o OF OF OF OF CO O Oj 9 Oj OF OF
186. 43 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 44 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 45 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 46 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 47 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 48 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 49 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 50 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 51 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 52 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 53 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 54 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 55 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 56 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 57 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 58 SOFT SWITCH 12 3 59 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 1 12 3 60 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 2 magicolor 2590MF lt Troubleshooting Appendix us z e o tO 9 Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting 2 5 lt Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 61 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 3 219 12 3 62 SOFT SWITCH 60 I 220 12 3 62 SOFT SWITCH 861 220 12 3 64 SOFT SWITCH 562 221 12 3 65 SOFT SWITCHEH G6S 221 12 38 66 SOFT SWITCH 64 222 13 Fax Protocols 223 131 G3 ECM G3 Error Correction Mode seen 223 18 2 Line 224 13 2 1 Procedure of G3 mode communication 224 13 3 Table of reference 225 13 4 How to analyze th
187. 43 dBm procedure 49 to 44 dBm 43 dBm 42 to 36 dBm 9 2 5 DTMF LEVEL Function Dual tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 9 dBm procedure 17 10 10 dBm 9 dBm 8 to 2 dBm 108 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 User service mode 9 2 6 CNG LEVEL Function Calling tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 11 dBm gt e o re N procedure 17 to 12 dBm 41 dBm 10 to 2 dBm 9 2 7 CED LEVEL Function Answer tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 11 dBm procedure 17 to 12 dBm 11 dBm 10 to 2 dBm 9 2 8 ECM MODE Function Select error correction mode Use The default setting is ON Setting ON When an error occurs during communication re send the frame where the procedure error occurs OFF Any error is ignored during communication 9 2 9 CODING SCHEME Function Select compression method in TX RX mode S Use The default setting is JBIG lt MMR A compression method Setting MR Acompression method procedure MH The simplest compression method JBIG The most complex compression method that generates the smallest code than any of following ones 109 9 User service mode Field Service
188. 5 11 3 13 ENERGY SAVE MODE 125 H 11 4 126 2 11 4 44 126 11 4 2 PRN SUB REGIST 127 11 4 3 CCD MAIN cs 128 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 44 COD SUB ZOOM nnt entr sati trie 129 11 45 CCDMAIN REGIST 130 11 46 CCD SUB REGIS Tiir 131 gt JADE SUB ZOOM E Aa eite re ree ed ER 132 11 48 ADF MAIN REGIST 132 11 49 ADF SUB sec esr id his 133 TATO itinere err eite nde rte ote caves ei ERO E 133 11 4 11 1st TRANSFER VOLTAGE 133 11 4 12 2nd TRANSFER 0 133 11413 VPP OFFSET 134 11 444 134 11 4 15 FLICKER SPECIAL 134 11 4 16 SERIAL 134 11 5 135 11 52 TOTAL PRINT 135 T1 5 2 cnet tierce dA LAS 135 11 5 3 PRINTER JAM 135 11 54 SABE SAM 135 11 55 TROUBLE 135 11 6 DISPLAY 136 WEGA 136 11 62 ENGINE
189. 6 sec within phase C before any corrected ECM frame 0010 Detect flag but nothing after CFR 0020 not correct frame within 6 sec or in non ECM mode one decoding line over 6 sec 0021 File full 0022 Owing to noise interference on the line receiving side can t receive correct data within spec ified time no ECM 002A Line Problem 0030 Did not receive any signal within 6 sec at phase D 0031 Received incorrect signal at phase D not EOP MPS EOM DCS PPS Q PPS 0032 not receive carrier within 6 sec After sending MCF Or signal 0033 Received DCN signal at phase D within pages not last page In non ECM mode when machine already received the data but next line data doesn t 0039 receive within 13 and RX machines both have different machine ID FAX model ID code in RSD 003F Remote side TSI not programmed in machine one touch or speed dial directory 0040 Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending CTR 0041 Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending PPR 0042 Did not receive correct signal after sending RNR signal 0043 Received incorrect signal at phase D in ECM mode 0044 Did not receive carrier signal FSK signal within 6 sec after sending MCF in ECM mode 0045 Did not receive any correct signal after sending RNR response with ERR signal 0046 Receive incorrect signal when sending RNR response with ERR signal 0047 not r
190. 6800 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 0 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 207 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 41 SOFT SWITCH 41 5 m Initial e Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit 17 7 V 17 8 Speed bps 12200 9600 7200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit No 5 1 0 1 7 0 V 29 V 29 V27 V 27 ter V 17 TX start speed 9600 7200 4800 2400 select receiving start Bit No 8 0 0 0 0 0 speed for V 17 Bit No 7 1 1 1 1 6 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 5 0 1 0 1 Speed Reserved BtNo 8 q T q 5 BitNo 7 4 BtNo 6 1 BtNo 5 1 1 4 Reserved Reserved 0 2 V 34 V 34 2 3 Speed bps 28800 26400 O 5 Bit No 3 0 0 E V 34 TX start speed Bit No 2 1 1 prohibit V 34 mode Bit No 1 2 0 2 E upper speed 4 V34 V34 V34 0 peed bps 77 000 21600 19200 16800 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 208 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 42 SOFT SWITCH 42 12 SOFT SWITCH set
191. 7 0 Report Bit No 6 0 4 Date Time format A When bit No 8 is 0 6 Date Time 2006 11 25 1 Bit No 7 0 Bit No 6 0 5 Memory near full Description KB 256 1024 1536 0 capacity for B W scan Bit No 5 0 1 1 nin 4 9 Bit No 4 0 0 1 1 3 Memory near full Description KB 1024 2512 5024 0 8 capacity for Color Bit No 3 0 1 1 5 Gray scanning Bit No 2 1 0 1 1 Reserved Reserved 0 214 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 55 SOFT SWITCH 55 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 56 SOFT SWITCH 56 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 57 SOFT SWITCH 57 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 215 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 58 SOFT SWITCH 58
192. 75 800 nm All Areas N CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those spec ified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10mw Wavelength 775 800 nm Denmark N ADVARSEL Usynlig Laserstr ling ved abning nar sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion Undga udseettelse for str ling Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sik kerheds kravene Halvlederlaser Laserdiodens hgjeste styrke 10mw Bolgelaengden 775 800 nm 5 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland Sweden N VARO Avattaessa suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina lasers teilylle l katso s teeseen LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS Laitteen Kayttaminen muulla kuin tassa k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle lasers teilylle Puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mw Aallonpituus 775 800 nm N VARNING Om apparaten anvands pa annat s tt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laser klass 1 Halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten f r laserdioden 10 mw V gl ngden 775 800 nm N V
193. 9 2 TX RESULT REPORT Function This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a transmission Use is printed automatically after the transmission is finished The default setting is ON ERROR Setting ON ON ERROR OFF procedure ON Prints the report after each transmission ON ERROR Prints the report after a transmission only if an error occurred OFF Does not print the report after each transmission even if an error has occurred 8 9 3 RX RESULT REPORT Function This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a reception is printed automatically after mailbox reception is finished Use If regular reception is not finished normally a report will always be printed regardless of the selected setting The default setting is ON ERROR Setting ON ON ERROR OFF procedure ON Prints the report after each reception ON ERROR Prints the report after a reception only if an error occurred OFF Does not print the report after each reception even if an error has occurred 100 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 10 USER SETTING 8 10 1 FAX PTT SETTING Function Sets the country where this machine is installed Use To change the country where this machine is installed The default setting is USA USA UK VIETNAM ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHINA CZECH DENMARK
194. A SRAM CLEAR P 147 MEMORY CLEAR P 147 122 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 3 SERVICE S CHOICE 11 3 1 TX SPEED Function Transmit start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following The default setting is V 34 33600 Setting V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 procedure V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 11 3 2 RX SPEED Function Reception start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following The default setting is V 34 33600 Setting 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 procedure V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 11 3 3 TX LEVEL Function PSK FSK signal output level Use Setting The default setting is 9 dBm procedure 17 to 10 dBm 9 dBm 8 to 2 dBm 11 3 4 RX LEVEL Function Reception sensitivity level Use Setting The default setting is 43 dBm procedure 49 to 44 dBm 43 dBm 42 to 36 dBm 11 3 5 DTMF LEVEL Function Dual tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 9 dBm procedure 17 to 10 dBm 9 dBm 8 10 2 dBm 123 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 11 SERVICE MODE F
195. ARNING e Check the exterior and frame for edges burrs and other damage ap The user or CE may be injured Do not allow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the product They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock S P or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or ap fire Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit Q Current can leak leading to a risk of product trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire ap 1 AN S 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints NWARNING Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit P H unit incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight Do not remove the cover of the write unit Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount ing position The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithiu
196. ARNING Osynlig laserstr lning nar denna del ppnad och sp rren urkopplad Betrakta ej str len Norway ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes annen mate enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstr ling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1 Halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 10 mw B lgelengde 775 800 nm SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 42 Laser Safety Label A laser safety labels is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JULY 26 2001 or and 4139P0E501DA SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4 3 Laser Caution Label A laser caution label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below 4139POE503DA SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 44 Precautions For Handling The Laser Equipment When laser protective goggles are to be used select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path such as when working around the printerhead and PC Drum be sure first to turn the copier OFF If the job requires that the copier be left ON take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles Ahighly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path
197. ARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC hereafter called the KMBT strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed Accordingly KMBT does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended Therefore this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the product properly Keep this Service Manual also for future service DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION In this Service Manual each of three expressions DANGER WARNING CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the product the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjus
198. ATION 8 5 1 ONE TOUCH DIAL Function This function can be used to program one touch dial keys with fax numbers allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the Use number using the 10 Key Pad This dialing method is convenient for programming num bers where faxes are frequently sent to A maximum of 9 fax numbers can be programmed Setting The contents of registration procedure Destination name 20 characters Dial No 50 digits Modem speed 33 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 9 6 kbps 8 5 2 SPEED DIAL Function This function can be used to program speed dial numbers with fax numbers allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the Use number using the 10 Key Pad A maximum of 100 fax numbers 001 to 100 can be programmed Setting The contents of registration procedure Destination name 20 characters Dial No 50 digits Modem speed 33 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 9 6 kbps 8 5 3 GROUP DIAL Function This function can be used to program a single one touch dial key with a maximum of 50 different fax numbers as one group Programming a one touch dial key with a group of Use fax numbers is convenient when documents are frequently sent to a set group of multi ple recipients Setting The contents ot registration racedur amp Group name 20 characters P Information of destinatio
199. CE MODE 111 SERVICE MODE entry procedure NOTE Ensure appropriate security for the Service Mode entry procedure It should NEVER be given to any unauthorized person us z e o tO 9 1 On the initial screen press the Menu Select key to call MACHINE SETTING to the screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 0 1 B Exiting Press the Stop Reset key 11 2 SERVICE MODE function tree The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen lt gt This function becomes available only when the optional tray2 is mounted on the machine SERVICE MODE gt A 1 SERVICE S CHOICE TX SPEED P 123 RX SPEED P 123 TX LEVEL P 123 RX LEVEL P 123 DTMF LEVEL 123 5 CNG LEVEL P 124 CED LEVEL P 124 ECM MODE 124 CODING SCHEME 124 TONER EMPTY REPORT 125 PROTOCOL REPORT 125 GDI TIMEOUT 125 ENERGY SAVE MODE 125 120 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE SERVICE MODE 2 ADJUST PRN MAIN REGIST 126 a PRN SUB REGIST P 127 8 CCD MAIN ZOOM P 128 9 CCD SUB ZOOM P 129 CCD MAIN REGIST P 130 CCD SUB REGIST P 131 ADF SUB ZOOM 132 ADF MAIN REGIST 132 ADF SUB REGIST P 133
200. CODING SCHEME 109 TONER EMPTY REPORT P 110 PROTOCOL REPORT P 110 2 SRU USAGE TRANSFER BELT E111 FUSER UNIT FAT TRANSFER ROLLER P 111 3 RESET COUNT TRANSFER BELT E11 FUSER UNIT P 111 TRANSFER ROLLER P112 4 CCD MOVE TO HOME P 112 107 magicolor 2590MF E lt 9 User service mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 92 FAX MAINTENANCE 9 2 1 TX SPEED tO N Function 8 Transmit start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following The default setting is V 34 33600 Setting V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 procedure V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 9 2 2 RX SPEED Function Reception start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following The default setting is V 34 33600 Setting V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 procedure V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 9 2 3 TX LEVEL Function PSK FSK signal output level Use Setting The default setting is 9 dBm procedure 17 to 10 dBm 9 dBm 8 to 2 dBm O _ lt 9 2 4 RX LEVEL Function Reception sensitivity level Use Setting The default setting is
201. CS 1 Send NSS signal if remote side is same model 7 uc 0 CNG sending duration Duration unit sec 40 60 70 120 I after dialing 7 0 1 1 6 Bit No 6 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 sec Normal case 5 timer 0 1 4 5 sec 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 Normal length Bit 1 to 64 3 DIS signal length 0 1 4 bytes DIS command bit 1 to 32 only 0 2 Increase default T1 Description sec 18 1 30 T1 40 T1460 0 Timing during calling Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 1 Only for TX function Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 2 T1 indicate the calling time after dialing can adjust the T1 time more long by change the default value The default T1 timer depends on each country regulation Some old machine can not accept DIS command over 4 bytes and every time will become fail In this case can set this bit to 1 If this bit set to 1 JBIG and V8 capability will disable Bit 3 Bit 8 192 automatically Sender machine s name will show on the other party s LCD or print on the report if remote side is the same model Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 22 SOFT SWITCH 22 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 Detect busy tone 1 Check busy tone within dial tone detection before dial
202. DMAX Y COLOR M COLOR COLOR K COLOR 1st TRANSFER VOLTAGE Y COLOR M COLOR C COLOR P 133 K COLOR K MONO 2nd TRANSFER VOLTAGE PLAIN TRANS LABELS 2 LETTERHEAD P 133 E J POSTCARD THICK STOCK GLOSSY VPP OFFSET P 134 5 ROHS 134 FLICKER SPECIAL 134 SERIAL NO 134 3 TOTAL PRINT MONO COPY COLOR COPY MONO PRINT 135 COLOR PRINT FAX PRINT TOTAL SCAN 135 PRINTER JAM 135 135 TROUBLE 135 121 magicolor 2590MF O _ lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 SERVICE MODE 4 DISPLAY MAIN F W VER 136 ENGINE F W VER P 136 NIC F W VER P 136 MAIN RAM SIZE P 136 SERIAL NO P 136 BB CPLD VER P 136 NAND CODE VER P 136 5 FUNCTION PAPER FEED TEST TRAY1 P 137 PRINT TEST PATTERN TRAY1 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 TRAY2 lt gt PATTERN PATTERN2 ADF FEED TEST 138 COPY ADF GLASS AREA 138 CCD MOVE HOME 138 FAX RES COPY TEST P 139 SCAN TEST P 139 6 SOFT SWITCH P 140 7 REPORT SERVICE DATA LIST P 140 ERROR CODE LIST P 143 T 30 PROTOCOL LIST P 144 8 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 TOS EXPANSION2 9 FACTORY TEST SIGNAL TEST RELAY TEST SENSOR TEST DIAL TEST P 146 VOLUME TEST PANEL BUZZER TEST RAM TEST 10 CLEAR DAT
203. EUROPE FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREECE HONG KONG HUNGARRY ISRAEL ITALY JAPAN KOREA MALAYSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND NORWAY PHILIPPINES POLAND PORTUGAL RUSSIA Setting SAUDI ARABIA SINGAPORE SLOVAKIA SOUTH AFRICA SPAIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND TAIWAN procedure TURKEY NOTE When this setting was changed the following settings will return to their default automatically Language PAPER SOURCE SETUP DATE FORMAT PRESET ZOOM PAPER SIZE in DIRECT PRINT SOFT SWITCH 8 10 2 DATE amp TIME Function Sets the date and time to be indicated on the output of print report Use At the installation or when date and time need to be changed 8 10 3 DATE FORMAT Function Sets the format of the date to be indicated on the output of PRINT REPORT Use To change the format of the date to be indicated on the output of PRINT REPORT Setting The default setting is MM DD YY procedure MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD 8 10 4 PRESET ZOOM Function Sets the type of paper for fixed zoom ratio setting Use To change the type of paper for fixed zoom ratio setting Setting The default setting is for the inch areas or METRIC for the metric areas procedure INCH METRIC 101 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 10 5 USER FAX NO Function Enter user fax number Us
204. Function The recipients programmed for the speed dial numbers are printed in numerical order Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times Um 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key P 3 Select the SPEED DIAL LIST and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 8 GROUP DIALA LIST Function The group dialing settings specified for one touch dial keys are printed in numerical Use order of the keys Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times E 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the GROUP DIALA LIST and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 9 MENU MAP Function Prints the current machine status Use Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times ice 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key P 3 Select the MENU MAP and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 10 CONFIGURATION PAGE Function Prints the current machine configuration It is used to confirm the following settings Supplies Status Coverage Information Counter Use Machine Setting Network Setting Firmware Version Options Fax Maintenance Fax Settings Settino 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 225 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key P 3 Select the CONFIGURATION PAGE
205. G Memory for receiving 4 MB for fax RX approx 250 pages included in 32 NAND flash Remote setting Available via USB Network Paper size 45 Legals LetterS One touch dial 9 one touch key on operation panel Speed dial 100 fax numbers Group dial 9 groups 50 destination stations for one group Functions Available maximum 125 stations Broadcast One touch dial 9 stations speed dial 100 sta tions full dial 16 stations Other supported functions Timer transmission phone book real time clock auto redial reduce split smoothing 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 e o tO 9 Blank Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check Maintenance 3 Periodic check 31 Maintenance parts To ensure that the machine produces good prints and to extend its service life it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life Counter e Maintenance conditions are based A4S 11 x 8 1 5 Standard mode and Preheat OFF e o re re 1 3 1 1 Replacement parts NOTE The following replacement cycles are based on 3 2 Concept of parts life See P 9 A Parts to be replaced by users CRUs T Ref No Classifica Part name Qua Replacement
206. HIGH for a predeter mined consecutive period of time while the polygon motor remains energized The SOS signal is not detected within a predetermined period of time after the output of a laser has been 12H Laser malfunction started The SOS signal is never detected in the image area 240 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 Error codes Code Detection Timing 14H 2nd image transfer pres sure retraction failure The state of the retraction position sensor 2nd image transfer is not changed from the unblocked to blocked state even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time during predrive The retraction position sensor 2nd image transfer is in the unblocked state even after the lapse of a predeter mined period of time during predrive The retraction position sensor 2nd image transfer is not blocked roller in the retracted position within a prede termined period of time after the retraction sequence of the 2nd transfer roller has been started The retraction position sensor 2nd image transfer is not unblocked roller in the pressed position within a pre determined period of time after the pressure sequence of the 2nd transfer roller has been started 15H Cleaning blade pressure retraction failure The state of the retraction position sensor cleaning blade is not changed from the blocked to unblocked state even after the lapse of a predetermined period of ti
207. ION When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list 8 No Section Part name Ref page 1 Unit Duplex Option P5 a 2 Exterior parts Right cover P 8 3 Board and etc AD drive board 4 Cooling fan motor P9 5 Transport motor P 12 6 Reverse motor 12 7 Registration solenoid 13 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list No Section Part name Ref page 1 Rollers Transport roller 14 33 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 3 1 Duplex Option N CAUTION Whenever removing or reinstalling the Duplex Option be sure first to unplug the power cord of the printer from the power outlet A Removal Procedure 1 Open the duplex option door 2 Turn the two locking knobs 1 to unlock the Duplex Option 4057F2C501DA Duplex Option 3 Other 4057F2C502DA B Reinst
208. IP PIN RTP DCN OO0CD At phase D transmitting unit sends out EOM times consecutively but receives no answer OOCE At phase D transmitting unit sends out EOM but receives DCN OOCF Received incorrect signal after sending DTC signal for V 34 polling 0000 Received ERR signal after sending EOR NULL 0001 Received incorrect response after sending PPS signal in V 34 0002 Receive DCN after send command PPS EOP signal 0003 Received DCN after sending PPS NULL signal 0004 Received DCN after sending PPS EOM signal 0008 Did not detect correct phase signal for polling within 25 seconds 0009 Did not detect correct phase signal after detecting silence after phase 2 OODA Did not detect phase 4 signal within 30 seconds or remote side hang up over 6 seconds OODB Did not receive any T 30 signal within 15 seconds in phase 4 OODC Received T 30 signal in phase 4 other than DCS DIS or DTC OODE Remote side no SUB capability in V 34 00 0 At phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS_NULL 3 times consecutively but receives no answer 00 1 Received incorrect response after sending PPS NULL OOE2 Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS NULL 00 4 phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS MPS times consecutively but no answer 00 5 Received incorrect response after sending PPS MPS OOE6 Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS 5
209. ITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 13 SOFT SWITCH 13 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 0 Yes 8 capability for G3 0 1 No 7 ipti 0 Delay time between Desorption sec 60 120 240 i transaction Bit No 7 0 1 1 6 Bit No 6 1 0 1 0 5 Super fine printing 0 No capability for receiving 4 Disable ultra fine 0 No 4 capability in RX mode 1 Yes 3 DTS mode 0 1 Yes Send DTC signal if RX 1 send DIS again 2 DIS signal in polling 0 RX mode 0 Yes no function on G4 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Bit 7 to 6 If set to 1 the time between each transaction will become longer in this case machine will wait more time before start to dial next transaction Bit 4 the resolution define Stand R8 x 3 85 lines mm Fine R8 x 7 7 lines mm Supper fine R8 x 15 4 lines mm Ultra fine R16 x 15 4 lines mm 186 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 14 SOFT SWITCH 14 12 SOFT SWITCH set Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 0 Reserved Reserved g Memory size level 1 Up to 128 KB 0 RX 0 Base on system configuration 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 0 2 Time between V 34 ms gt e E 19 150 4 5 ANSam signal and 2 4 FSK DIS signal BitNo 2
210. M2 5 Paper loop sensor PS1 2 Door sensor PS2 6 AD drive board ADDB 3 Transport motor M1 7 Transport sensor PS3 4 Registration solenoid SD1 8 Cooling fan motor FM1 2 f lt 290 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 19 4 Lower Feeder Unit Option 19 Parts layout drawing 1 x 2 PACA 3 lt 4139F5C503DA 1 PF drive board PFDB 2 Paper empty sensor PS1 3 Tray set detecting switch SW1 4 Paper pick up solenoid SD1 291 magicolor 2590MF 5 e lt 20 Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 20 Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover magicolor 2590MF Not possible to confirm by removing external cover 4139F5C504DB No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN5 1 1 7 CN7 E 7 to 8 x 2 CN3 D 3 8 CN11 K to L 8 3 CN2 D 4 9 CN10 K 11 8 4 D 5 10 CN9 K 10 5 CN6 1 1 11 CN4 D 3 6 8109 292 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 20 Connector layout drawing 4139F5C505DA No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN13 5 4 CN11 F 4 2 CN7 B 5 to 6 5 CN14 F 4 to 5 3 CN12 4 293 magicolor 2590MF e 5 e lt 20
211. NS CONFIG Function This function is used to enable or disable the DDNS Dynamic Updates in the Domain Use Name System setting Setting The default setting is ENABLE 2 2 lt procedure DISABLE ENABLE 104 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 13 E MAIL SETTING 8 13 1 SENDER NAME Function This function is used to specify the 5 Setting The default setting is magicolor 2590MF procedure Up to 20 characters can be entered for the sender name 8 13 2 E MAIL ADDRESS Function This function is used to specify the e mail address of the sender NOTE Use Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the e mail address to use Up to 64 characters be entered for the sender address Setting 6 2 If customer does not receive e mail on the copier enter the e mail address of the cus procedure ne tomer s administrator 8 13 3 SMTP SERVER Function This function is used to enter the IP address or host name of an SMTP server NOTE Use Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use Setting Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name 9 The DNS settings must have been specified before specifying the
212. No 3 1 1 1 1 3 Bit No 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 TX Level select for BitNo1 1 1 8 PSK FSK 2 i Level dBm 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 O 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 N lt 181 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 8 SOFT SWITCH 08 5 Initial e Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 2 8 Sending RTN signal 1 Normal Fine 6 12 continue error line b 7 Detect busy tone after 0 Not to detect 1 Sending CED signal 0 Not to send 4 5 Reserved 0 1 3 1 3 1 3 13 1 3 4 3 4 15 1 3 3 0 Auto dial 3 interval 3 Bit No 4 0 Bit No 010 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 1111001 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 m Re dial interval 1 Auto dial 1 2 5 1 2 2 3 10 interval 1 2 5 2 2 2 3 10 2 1 5 2 2 10 10 10 0 E 1 5 2 2 2 3 10 2 2 3 15 2 2 3 10 2 3 2 2 2 1 Bit No 4 1 1 1111 1 11 1 1 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 01 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bi
213. OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF S ojo O OF OF OF OF CO Oj jo o Of OF OF OF Of OF OF OF Of OF OF OF A CO Al CO S CO OF OF OF OF A ALO oo o OF OF O O Ojo o Of OF OF OF CO CO S OF OF OF OF OO OF OF A O p 090 09 OF OF OF OF 9 LOL O OF OF OF 9 9 OF OF OF OF O oj CO 9 9 Oj CO oO oO O O OF O O O OF 090 CO OF CO OF OF O P OF CO OF OF OF O OF CO OF ojoj oO gt Of OF OF OF OF A OF A OF OF OF A CO O S O O O O O OD P OUO CO OI P CO OF CO OF CO OF 9 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF O O O O Al O O o Of OF OF Of A Of OF OF OF Of S OF OF OF OF OF S OF oO 0 OF OF OF gt OF OF OF OF Of OF OF OF OF OF SA gt OF OF CO SA CO OO oO OF CO Of OF OF OF CO OC OF CO OF CO OF OF CO oO
214. P 192 3 DIS signal length 2 1 Increase default T1 Timing during calling Only for TX function 8 Detect busy tone before dial 7 Regard dial tone as busy tone after dialing 22 P 193 6 Check Busy tone method 4 3 2 1 CED signal output level 23 Reserved P 193 24 Reserved P 194 25 4 3 Flash key time in ON hook key dial P 194 8 7 Dial tone detection time before disconnected 26 195 Dial tone Insensitivity 0 to 40 dBm 27 4 3 2 1 Immunity for Dial Tone receiver P 196 150 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set Soft Switch Bit No Designation Page No 8 7 6 5 Time to dial after dial tone on the line 8 28 P 197 4 3 2 1 CED duration time within calling period 5 29 5 4 3 2 1 Time To Dial after seize the line when dial tone detection P 198 E 8 7 Pause Delay Time Within Digits 30 199 2 Signal tone Insensitivity dBm after Dial for busy tone 31 Reserved P 200 32 Reserved P 200 7 V 17 Echo protection tone 6 V 29 Echo protection tone 33 201 5 Compromise equalize enable CEQ in the transmit path TCEQ 4 Compromise equalize enable CEQ in the receiver path RCEQ 34 2 Password capability in DIS DTC frame 201 8 7 Dial tone table switch time 35 6 5 4 Dial tone frequency upper range index P 202 3 2 1 Dial tone frequency low range index 8
215. P 31 3 Remove the drum cartridge See P 16 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 4 Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol wipe the PH window 1 clean of dirt 4139F2C518DA 3 3 3 Toner cartridge C M Y K A 1 2 Removal procedure Check the color of the toner cartridge to be replaced on the control panel Press the TC changer key until the color of the toner cartridge to be replaced with a new one is displayed Open the top cover See 31 4 Open the front cover 1 and make sure that the specific toner cartridge to be replaced is in the front 4139F2C519DA 13 magicolor 2590MF 7 2 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Hold onto the handle 1 of the toner cartridge pull it and remove the toner cartridge 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C520DA B Reinstallation procedure NOTE Do not let the toner cartridge stand upright or keep it in that upright position 5 2 4139fs2506c0 1 Prepare a new toner cartridge 2 Shake the toner cartridge 1 a few times to distribute the toner 4139152534 0 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139152504 0 4139F2C521DA 4139F2C522DA 3 Periodic check 3 Remove the protective cover 1 4 Align
216. PTT SETTING The marketing area is set at Fax PTT Setting by using LSU utility software When the setting is made the procedures of SERVICE MODE gt CLEAR DATA gt SRAM CLEAR the default setting is defined according to the current setting of market ing area Bit No can be changed with the following way SOFT SWITCH of SERVICE MODE See P 140 6 SOFT SWITCH gt E BitNo 12345678 SERVICE MODE 6 SOFT SWITCH 01 4139F3E529DA Hex binary HEX conversion list 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D ElF 4 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 7 1 1 11 1 1 Bit No 2 6 01011111 105 0 5 0 1 1 0 0 1111 01 011 1 1 5 01110111 15 0 1 0 1 01 11 011 01 110 1 12 2 Default setting 12 2 1 Country for each marketing area NOTE A different country may be applicable depending on the communications stan dard The marketing area settings is set in the procedure of USER SETTING FAX PTT SETTING See P 101 148 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 2 2 Soft switch list Soft Switch No Bit No Designation Page No 01 2 1 V 34 CI signal byte number 175 8 7 between phase to phase D signal V 17 magicolor 2590MF 6 Header TX selection open to user 02 176 3 2 Transmit MCF si
217. T COVER CAUTION OUTPUT BIN FULL Exit section Exit tray P 238 CAUTION REMOVE PAPER CAUTION Document feeding ORIGINAL DOC JAM section Auto Document Feeder Document transport sec Top cover Unit Service Manual CAUTION tion 26 OPEN DOC FEED COVER Document exit section CAUTION PAPER MISFEED 4 2 Lower feeder unit Trav 2 Lower Feeder Unit Ser CAUTIONI paper feed section y vice Manual 13 OPEN FRONT COVER CAUTION Duplex option paper feed PAPER JAM section Duplex option door Duplex Option Service CAUTION Duplex option paper con Manual P 17 OPEN DUPLEX COVER _ section 14 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the relevant cover clear the sheet of misfeed media and close the cover 233 magicolor 2590MF S Q 5 magicolor 2590MF D C 14 Jam display 14 2 Sensor layout Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 F 4139F4C507DA 234 1 2 3 4 Exit tray full sensor Exit sensor Fusing paper loop sensor Registration sensor PS11 PS7 PS8 PS1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 14 3 Solution 14 3 1 Initial check items 14 Jam display When a media misfeed occurs check the following
218. UAL RX Manual reception 8 7 6 FOOTER Function This function can be used to set whether or not the reception information date received Use number of pages etc is printed at the bottom of each received document The default setting is OFF Setting procedure ON Add footer OFF No footer 1 Attaching footer print When footer is selected ON it is printed at the end of printable area 4 mm line area from the end of printable area is kept for printing footer It should be attached on footer area regardless of image length If the received image is divided into 2 pages or more footer is printed in the specified location of all the recording sheets of paper printed 2 Image data area 5 The received image data is printed on the area except 12 mm from recording paper size No printable area 8 mm 7 in footer area 4 mm 7 in The following table is the 5 image printable area of each recording paper size due to setting of footer print 8 Footer OFF Footer ON 2 Paper length Image data area Image data area Footer area A4S 297 mm 289 mm 285 mm 4 LetterS 279 mm 271 mm 267 mm 4 mm Legal 356 mm 348 mm 344 mm 4 mm 8 7 7 SELECT TRAY Function This function can be used to select which paper tray can be used to supply paper when printing received documents or transmission reports A paper tray that cannot be used Use for supplying paper can also
219. Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 2 10 TONER EMPTY REPORT Function Select to generate a report to a specific destination when toner empty status occurs in Use the engine The default setting is OFF us e o tO 9 ON Generate a report to report destination OFF Not to generate report Setting If ON is selected select generate report and send to remote side when toner runs out procedure Enter the telephone number for which the report is to be produced Fax number specifications An up to 20 digit number that may consist of 0 9 8 pause and space 0 9 pause The report will generate after 20 minutes 24 hours 48 hours or 72 hours after the event has occurred or until the condition is gone A Toner empty report example SERVICE REPORT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Jul 01 2006 15 12 The Fax s following conditions were appears the machine may be can not work correctly the Fax already send a report to your dealer automatically They will contact with you soon Toner status Empty 4139F3C544DA 9 2 11 PROTOCOL REPORT 5 Function Print communication report Use Choose one from among the following The default setting is OFF Setting M OFF Disable T 30 communication report procedure ON Print T 30 communication report ON ERROR Print T 30 communica
220. X PRINT i ttt 114 8 1048 TOTAL SCAN 114 g 10 5 TX RX 114 10 6 PRINT REPORT 115 10 6 1 TX RESULT REPORT 115 10 6 2 RX RESULT REPORT 115 10 6 3 ACTIVITY 115 10 6 4 MEMORY DATA LIST ttti 115 10 6 5 MEMORY IMAGE PRINT 115 1066 ONE TOUCH LIST aute o cbe a db ea o ent 116 10 6 7 SPEED DIAL LIST ttti 116 10 6 8 GROUP DIALA LIST ttt 116 8 10 69 REND DU 116 5 10 6 10 CONFIGURATION 116 5 10 6 11 DEMO PAGE ttt ttt ttt 119 EA O 0D 120 11 4 SERVICE MODE entry procedure 120 11 2 SERVICE MODE function tree m 11 3 SERVICE S tud ab 2 n MEDI lo c 5 Tite lt gt 46 1133 TX LEVEL ttt ttt ttt itus RX LEVEL eere ett Lone er 11 DTMELEVEL iicet 123 11 8 8 124 1153 OEDLEVEL up peto ce o c Rte 124 E 138 user cee annn 124 2 11 39 CODING SCHEME 124 11 3 10 TONER EMPTY REPORT 125 11 3 11 PROTOCOL REPORT 125 11 3 12 GDI TIMEOUT 12
221. a Tem 5 YES the 2nd transfer roller scratched Replace the transfer belt unit 6 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the fusing unit alter performing step 5 Replace the high voltage unit D f 278 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 24 Uneven pitch A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 213815450750 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Is the toner cartridge for each 1 Toner cartridge color of toner installed in posi NO Reinstall tion Is the PH unit secured in position 2 PH unit with the fixing screw NO Secure it in position Is the drive mechanism of the Clean or replace the toner car 9 toner cartridge dirty or damaged tridge Is the photo conductor dirty 5 Paumcariidge scratched or worn YES Replace the drum cartridge Are the 2nd transfer roller and 5 2nd transfer roller drive mechanism dirty deformed YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller or worn Are the rollers and drive mecha 6 Fusing unit nism of the fusing unit dirty YES Replace the fusing unit scratched deformed or worn 7 The problem has peeri eliminated the transfer belt unit after performing step 6
222. age for G3 mode Bit 1 N G indicate our side detected signal from other end In this case machine can resend the same page up to three or just one time and this use for G3 mode only Bit 2 3 G3 mode if error line for each page machine will send instead of in this case some machine will resend the same page again The retry times depend on other end Bit 6 If this bit set to 0 the header select function can not change by user only changeable by serviceman in service mode 2 lt 176 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 3 SOFT SWITCH 03 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX with station ID 0 No magicolor 2590MF Number of Pause 0 No any limitation within phone number 4 Max up to 2 P within inputted telephone number 0 Continue to dial 6 Re dial prohibit for 0 ANSWER 1 Not allowed to re dial if no any FAX signal or detected busy tone after dialing 5 Reserved Reserved 0 Rx level 49 dB 48 dB 47 dB 46 dB 45 dB Bit No 4 0 Bit No 3 Bit No 2 Bit No 1 a ol o ojo Rx level 44 42 41 40 3 Bit No 4 Bit No 3 Bit No 2 1 Bit No RX level setting 6 Rx level 39 dB 38 dB 37 dB 36 2 Bi
223. all Procedure 4057F2C503DA 3 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Remove the Duplex Option 1 Open the duplex option door 1 and turn the two locking knobs 2 to unlock the Duplex Option Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 2 Mount the Duplex Option 1 onto the printer main body Duplex Option 7 2 4057F2C504DA 3 Turn the two locking knobs 1 to lock the Duplex Option into position NOTE When locking the Duplex Option into position be sure to hold the unit with a hand and at the same time press it up against the printer main body 4057F2C505DA Duplex Option 5 2 3 4057F2C506DA 3 3 2 Right cover 2 3 1 4057F2C507DA 3 3 3 1 AD drive board ADDB Remove the right cover See P8 4057F2C508DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 NOTE After the Duplex Option has been locked into position check that the two locking knobs are in the correct locked position 4 Close the duplex option door 1 1 Remove the screw 1 unlock three tabs 2 and remove the right cover 3 2 Remove the screw 1 and the AD drive board cover 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 Disconnect all connectors from the AD drive board 1 4 Remove three screws 2 and the AD drive
224. and swing open the a IR unit 2 5 Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position 1 4139F2C514DA 2 Open the top cover See P 31 gt 3 Disconnect the connector 1 4139F2C524DA 17 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 3 Periodic check 1 2 4139F2C525DA 3 3 6 2nd transfer roller A Replacement procedure 4139F2C514DA 2 Open the top cover See P 31 3 Remove the drum cartridge See P 16 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Remove two shoulder screws 1 5 Remove the transfer belt unit 2 NOTE When replacing the transfer belt unit use care not to touch the sur face of the belt A scratchy or dirty belt could result in image problems 6 Toreinstall reverse the order of removal NOTE After the transfer belt unit has been replaced with a new one reset the maintenance counter of the transfer belt unit See P 111 1 Pullthe lever 1 and swing open the IR unit 2 NOTE Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 4 Remove the 2nd transfer roller assy 3 as follows While pushing the levers 2 of the holders 1 located Q on both si
225. and then press the Menu Select key 116 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 A Sample of Configuration Page 10 Display mode DATE 24 SEP 2007 03 59 Supplies Status Toner Cartridge Cyan Toner Cartridge Magenta Toner Cartridge Yellow Toner Cartridge Black Drum Cartridge Coverage Information Normalized Total Faces Counter Color Faces Printed Monochrome Faces Printed Total Average C Average M Counter Total Faces Counter Color Faces Counter Copy Printer Monochrome Faces Counter Copy Printer Fax Machine Setting Controller Serial Number Engine Serial Number Auto Panel Reset min Energy Save Mode min Language Lamp Off Time Auto Continue Toner Empty Stop Toner Near Empty Remote Monitor Firmware Version Engine Controller NIC FPGA code NAND code Options Tray2 Duplex Fax Setting Fax Number Scan Density Resolution Header No of Rings Footer Tone Pulse Line Monitor Volume TX Report RX Report Configuration Page Status Remaining Empty 0 Near Empty 4 Ready 88 Ready 90 Ready 80 Normalization All sizes converted to A4 equivalent Current Toner Cartridge Coverage XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX Average Y XXXX XXXX Average K XXXX xxxxxx Total Duplex Counter Color Sheets Counter XXXXXX Copy XXXXXX XXXXXX Printer XXXXXX Monochrome Sheets Counter XXXXXX Copy XXXXXX XXXXXX Printer XXXXXX XXXXXX Network Setti
226. at MPS TX Z EOP or MPS EOM 2 MCF at MPS RX D DCN E 4139F4E513DA 18 3 1 Error occurring during reception Reception is canceled 280 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 18 FAX error 18 4 Error code 18 4 1 Reception Code Possible Causes of Error 0001 signal received within 35 sec in manual receive mode 0003 Received DIS after sending DIS signal 0004 DCN after sending DTC signal 0006 Detect busy tone within receiving phase B 0009 not receive any signal within 35 sec in manual polling mode 0010 DCN signal after sending DTC signal in polling RX 0011 not receive any correct response after sending three DTC signals 0012 Remote side Password does not match in polling RX our side no file to be polled 0013 not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending CFR data phase 0014 not receive T 30 signal after sending signal 0015 Line polarity change within receiving phase B to D 0016 Receive DCN signal after sending PTT signal 0017 not receive any response from remote side after sending type of xxx EOM signal 0018 not detect energy within 6 sec after sending FTT command 0019 Received DCN signal after sending CFR signal 001A energy on line over
227. atch that of the print data To print data on the media loaded in the tray if the media loaded in the tray does not Use match that of the print data Setting The default setting is OFF procedure ON OFF 87 magicolor 2590MF E 25 lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 2 11 CALIBRATION Function Executes the image stabilization sequence To calibrate the engine when there are print image quality problems magicolor 2590MF Use To calibrate the engine when the transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller are replaced with new ones The default setting is OFF ON OFF Setting procedure 1 Select MACHINE SETTING and then 10 CALIBRATION and press the Menu Select key 2 Select ON and press the Menu Select key Image stabilization is executed 8 2 12 REMOTE MONITOR Function T To set whether the service side should monitor user equipment remotely se Setting The default setting is OFF procedure ON OFF T 2 lt 88 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 3 PAPER SOURCE SETUP 8 3 1 TRAY1 PAPER Function Sets the type and size of the paper loaded in tray1 Use When the type and size of the paper loaded tray1 have been changed The def
228. ation Page No S 44 P 209 S 45 6 Close network P 210 8 8 Daylight savings timer g 4 RX print mode 46 3 Default TX mode P 210 2 Header for FAX TX 1 Print model name on top of TX page if name not register 47 211 5 Footer 8 Activity report 7 6 Result Report 48 5 4 RX Result Report P 211 3 Error report and Network scanner 2 If machine receive error Mail the mail is deleted kept 6 Print RX Mailbox Report method 49 5 Re dial method if Comm Fail P212 4 3 2 1 No of rings 50 8 Transmit or cancel after time out in Memory TX P 212 4 3 30 monitor report selection 51 213 2 Send unsent page mode for memory transmission 52 P213 53 Reserved P214 D 8 Report Date Time type 7 6 Report Date Time format 2 54 214 5 4 Memory near full capacity for B W scanning 3 2 near full capacity for Color Gray scanning 55 215 56 215 57 215 58 8 Time out PSK to FSK delay time P 216 6 5 4 59 3 21 Time Between GMT Greenwich Mean Time P 217 3 Print Mailbox RX image even password are not correct 60 2 Off hook alarm after communication P 220 1 Display destination selection within TX phase C 61 4 3 2 1 Max No of
229. ault setting varies according to the voltage of the printer The default setting is PLAIN PAPER PLAIN PAPER TRANSPARENCY LABELS LETTERHEAD ENVELOPE POSTCARD THICK STOCK GLOSSY Default setting of paper size depend on the marketing area setting USA and Canada LETTER Other country 4 lt PLAIN PAPER LETTERHEAD gt LETTER G LETTER STATEMENT EXECUTIVE FOLIO OFICIO A4 B5 A5 LEGAL Setting procedure NOTE OFICIO only display when PTT MEXICO lt TRANSPARENCY LABELS THICK PAPER GLOSSY gt LETTER LETTER STATEMENT EXECUTIVE 4 5 5 lt ENVELOPE gt 10 C5 C6 DL MONARCH CHOU 3 YOU 4 CHOU 4 lt POSTCARD gt DOUBLE POSTCARD J POSTCARD 8 3 2 TRAY2 PAPER Sets the size of the paper loaded in tray2 Function This function becomes available only when the optional tray2 is mounted in the machine Use To set the size of paper loaded in tray2 according to that actually loaded PLAIN PAPER only Setting Default setting of paper size depend on the marketing area setting procedure USA and Canada LETTER Other country A4 LETTER A4 89 magicolor 2590MF lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 84 COPY SETTING 8 4 1 MODE Function Sets the type of document used Use When the type of document has been changed The default setting is MIX magicolor 2590MF
230. be specified This function is only available when an optional paper tray is installed The default setting is Enable Tray1 Enable Disable Setting Tray2 Enable Disable procedure cassette is not displayed When setting value is determined reception setting of utility menu is indicated This setting has effect on RX print and Report print 98 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 8 8 COMM SETTING 8 8 1 TEL LINE TYPE Function This function can be used to specify the dialing system If this function is not correctly set to the type of dialing system used faxes cannot be sent Select the correct setting after checking which type of dialing system is used by your telephone line There are two types of telephone dialing systems tone dialing PB and pulse dialing Use DP10pps or DP20pps Faxes cannot be sent if this machine is not set to the system used by your telephone line Select the correct setting after checking which type of dial ing system is used The default setting is TONE TONE Tone line PULSE 10pps Pulse line of 10 pps Setting procedure PULSE 20pps Pulse line of 20 pps NOTE In USA GERMANY and NEW ZEALAND after selected this item displayed will dis play NOT AVAILABLE 8 8 2 LINE MONITOR Function This function can be used to set the volume when monitoring
231. ble Causes of Error 0080 Did not detect G3 signal within 35 sec specified by ITU T in phase 0081 Received DTC signal in transmission phase 0082 Transmitting unit receives a signal other than DIS DTC and DCN in phase 0083 Detected FSK signal but did not receive any signal within 35 seconds 0084 DCN signal in phase B 0085 Transmitting unit sending DCS times consecutively but each time responds with DIS DTC 0086 Detected response signal other than DTC DIS FTT DCN or CFR after sending DCS 0087 Training attempt has failed because speed unit cannot adjust to low lower speed 0088 Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal 0088 Receiver s protocol of DIS is received but it is not compatible with our machine 008D Receiver s protocol of DIS is received but remote side can t receive document temporary may be cause by run out of paper or other reason 008 Remote side CSI number not defined in machine one touch or speed dial directory 008 not ready to receive V 34 data during 6 seconds after receiving CFR signal 0090 Called side document not ready for our polling 0091 Sending out DCS TCF signal 3 times consecutively but no signal in response from receiver 0092 Remote side disconnected during transmitting phase 0093 Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal for V 34 0094 Time out during transmit ECM frame or RCP command 0095 Wrong ID number when Polling RX
232. board 1 Duplex Option 1 4057F2C509DA 3 3 4 Cooling fan motor FM1 1 Remove the right cover See P8 2 Open the duplex option door 1 and disconnect the connector 2 7 i 4057F2C518DA Duplex Option 3 Other 1 4057F2C510DA gt 4057F2C519DA 4057F2C511DA 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Remove the screw 1 4 Unhook the two dowel pins 1 and remove the duplex option door 2 5 Remove the screw 1 unlock the tab 2 and remove the harness cover 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 6 Remove two screws 1 unlock two tabs 2 and remove the duplex door upper cover 3 Duplex Option 4057F2C512DA 7 i 7 Unlock four tabs 1 and remove the cooling fan motor assy 2 4057F2C520DA 8 Remove the cooling fan motor cover 1 4057F2C513DA 11 Duplex Option 5 3 1 2 4057F2C514DA 3 3 5 Transport motor M1 1 3 2 4 4057F2C515DA 3 3 6 Reverse motor M2 T Remove the right cover See P8 1 4057F2C521DA 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 Unlock three tabs 1 and remove the cooling fan motor
233. cation where it will be exposed to direct light such as sunlight 4139152538 0 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 4 Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol wipe the pick up roller 1 AHL clean of dirt magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C516DA Removal procedure 1 Open the top cover See P 31 2 Remove the drum cartridge See P 16 7 2 Position the removed drum car tridge as shown in the illustration at the left Be sure to keep the drum cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty Do not leave the drum cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes and do not place the removed drum cartridge in a location where it will be exposed to direct light such as sunlight 4139fs2538c0 11 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Remove the paper feed roller 1 dope magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C517DA 5 2 3 3 2 PH window A Cleaning procedure 1 the lever 1 and swing open the IR unit 2 NOTE Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position 4139F2C514DA 2 Open the top cover See
234. cification adjust it according to the following procedure Press the Menu Select key Using the A V key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key Place the test pattern on the Original Glass Then make a test copy again and check it OND Adjustment Instructions If the width of D in the test pattern is longer than the specified width sid Decrease the setting If the width of D in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width PM Increase the setting 128 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 4 4 SUB ZOOM Function To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction Use When the Scanner unit has been replaced NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been performed Adjustment Specification Adjust the width of E in the copy of the test pattern1 so that the following specification is met 200 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 lt 4139F3C549DA Adjustment Range 2 0 0 2 0 Step 0 4 Setting Procedure 1 Print the test pattern See P 137 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select CCD SUB ZOOM of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE
235. communication to HIGH Use LOW or OFF Setting The default setting is LOW procedure HIGH OW OFF 8 8 3 PSTN PBX Function This function can be used to set whether the connected telephone wiring is a public switched telephone network PSTN or a private branch exchange PBX For a PBX system the outside line access number or extension number must be spec ified Use The connected wiring system can be set to either PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network or PBX Private Branch Exchange For a PBX system the outside line access number or extension number must be specified The outside line access number or extension number is programmed in the key The default setting is PSTN Setting procedure PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PBX Private Branch Exchange 99 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 9 REPORTING 8 9 1 ACTIVITY REPORT Function Every 60 transmissions receptions a report can be printed to show the results of the transmissions receptions This function can be used to set whether the report is printed Use automatically when the 60th transmission reception is reached Setting The default setting is ON procedure ON OFF 8
236. control board 4139F2C573DA 41 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 NOTE d When mounting parameter chip PJ24 align the notches indicated by A in the illustration magicolor 2590MF 4138152544 0 5 3 13 DC power supply 1 DCPU1 1 Remove the printer control board See 41 2 Remove the image processing board See 39 3 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 5 2 4 Disconnect two connectors 1 4139F2C555DA 5 Remove the harness protective seal 1 4139F2C558DA 42 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 4139F2C559DA 4139F2C560DA 5 Other 6 Remove nine screws 1 and pull the DC power supply1 assy 2 toward you NOTE Do not pull the power unit assy hard as a number of harnesses are connected to it 7 Disconnect five connectors 1 from the DC power supply1 8 Remove three screws 1 and the DC power supply 1 2 43 magicolor 2590MF 7 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 14 DC power supply 2 DCPU2 1 Remove the left cover See 32 2 Remove the screw 1 3 Remove two saddles 2 and discon nect two connectors 3 Then remove the DC power supply 2 assy 4 3 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C533DA
237. cover right Use care not to pull the unit with an exces sive force so you don t break the wire Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 20 Press the rack release lever and turn the rack so that the screw on the PH unit can be accessed through the hole in the machine frame 21 Remove three screws 1 and the PH unit 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C571DA Precautions for reinstallation of the PH unit When reinstalling the PH unit make sure that you insert the lever 1 of the PH shutter into the lever of the machine 2 7 4139F2C572DA 57 magicolor 2590MF 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 22 Paper feed unit 1 2 Remove the rear cover See 31 Remove the right cover See P 32 Remove the left cover See P 32 Remove the high voltage unit and shield See steps 1 to 2 of the removal procedure for Tray1 paper pick up solenoid SD1 on 70 remove the Rack Drive Assy See steps 1 through 3 of the removal procedure for Developing motor M3 on P 66 Remove the ventilation fan motor See P 63 7 Remove one screw 1 unlock two tabs 2 and remove the ventilation fan duct 3 8 Lay the main body of the printer on its back 9 Remove five screws 1 4139F2C601DA 58 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 10 Unhook two dowels 1
238. crews 1 Disconnect two connectors 2 and remove the ground wire 3 Then remove the control panel 4 Disconnect the connector 1 Remove seven screws 2 two brackets 3 and the operation board 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 9 Operation key board 4139F2C613DA 2 3 um gt 4 1 4139F2C663DA 4139F2C665DA 5 Other 1 Open the IR unit 2 Remove the three caps 1 3 Remove three screws 1 4 Disconnect two connectors 2 and remove the ground wire 3 Then remove the control panel 4 5 Remove four screws 1 the bracket 2 and the operation key board 3 37 magicolor 2590MF i gt 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 10 USB board USB 2 1 Remove the right cover Q See P 32 i pl 2 Remove two screws 1 and discon gt nect the connector 2 Then remove the USB board assy 3 1 4139F2C615DA 3 Remove two screws 1 and the USB board 2 4139F2C616DA 38 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 11 Image processing board IPB LL 1 Remove the rear cover See 31 2 Remove the left cover 5 See P 32 8 nm 3 Remove eleven screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 Then remove the image processing board protective cover
239. ct specifications MAINTENANCE Explanation of service schedule maintenance steps ser vice tools removal reinstallation methods of major parts and firmware version up method etc ADJUSTMENT SETTING Explanation of utility mode service mode and mechanical adjustment etc TROUBLESHOOTING Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes and their countermeasures etc APPENDIX Parts layout drawings connector layout drawings timing chart overall layout drawing are attached C 1 Notation of the service manual A Product name In this manual each of the products is described as follows 1 IC board Standard printer 2 magicolor 2590MF Main body 3 Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Windows NT 4 0 or Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista When the description is made in combination of the OS s mentioned above Windows 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 2000 Windows NT 2000 XP Vista Windows 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista B Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company C Feeding direction When the long side of the media is parallel with the feeding direction it is called short edge feeding The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is called the long edge feeding Sho
240. d Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set J Market area 10 Marketing area Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 Soft Switch No magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 E lt CO Of Of OF O O OF OF gt A OF Al OF OF gt oj CO gt CO OF Al oj OF OF A Al OF OF OF Al S CO OF CO OF OF CO oj 9 OF OF OF Al oj oj O CO O 9 O OF S OF 9 OF OF OF gt A Al Alo oo oj o CO OF OF OF OF Oj O O o OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF Al O an oj oj Of CO OF A OF OF OF OF OF
241. des pull the holders 1 to 5 the front 9 Use not to lose the two springs of the 2nd transfer roller assy They can easily come off 5 Remove the conductive material 1 gear 2 two springs 3 two holders 4 and two collars 5 5 6 reinstall reverse the order of 2 removal NOTE After the 2nd transfer roller has been replaced with a new one reset the maintenance counter of the 2nd transfer roller See P 112 4139F2C527DA 19 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 3 Periodic check Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 7 Fusing unit NOTE Before replacing the fusing unit ensure that it has had time to cool down 1 2 Remove the rear cover See P 31 Remove the left cover See 32 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See 8 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual Remove the transfer belt unit See P 17 Remove the IR unit See P 50 6 Remove the screw 1 and remove the top left cover 2 7 Disconnect two connectors PJ6 PJ7 1 from the printer control board 4139F2C528DA 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 8 Remove the screw 1 9 Remove the two saddles 2 and dis connect two connectors 3 Then remove the DC power supply 2 pro tective cover 4 magicolor 2590MF 2 4139F2C533DA
242. e The specified number is printed in the header of sent faxes Setting 20 digits procedure The characters which be inputted are numbers from 0 to 9 Space and us e o tO 9 8 10 6 USERNAME Function The User is used for the indication of destination station at the time of the com Use munication between same models Setting Maximum 32 digits character can be inputted procedure 8 11 DIRECT PRINT 8 11 1 IMAGE QUALITY Function Sets the output resolution for camera direct photo printing Use To change the output resolution for camera direct photo printing Setting The default setting is DRAFT procedure DRAFT NORMAL normal FINE fine 8 11 2 PAPER SIZE 92 Function Sets the paper size for camera direct photo printing Use To change the paper size for camera direct photo printing The default setting varies according to the voltage of the printer lt TRAY1 gt lt PLAIN PAPER LABELS POSTCARD THICK STOCK GLOSSY When setting other than POSTCARD GLOSSY is selected The default setting is 4 or LETTER 4 5 5 LETTER STARTMENT When a POSTCARD is selected Setting A4 B5 A5 LETTER procedure STARTMENT J POSTCARD When a GLOSSY is selected A4
243. e 1 64 octets preferred t 8 Set to 0 0 Invalid Ready to transmit a facsimile document polling peri n 10 0 Invalid 1 Receiver fax operation a Data signalling rate Bit No Data signalling rate 12 14 13 12 11 gne ng 14431211 une d 13 V 27 ter fall back 2400 bit s 0 01010 rec V 27ter 0 0 0 1 Rec V29 9600 bit s 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Rec V 27 ter rec V 29 Rec V 27 ter and 4800 bit s 991114 V 29 rec V 27ter 0 1 0 0 Not used 7200 bit s 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 29 011 1 0 Reserved 0 1 0 0 Invalid 0 4 4 1 Reserved 0 1 0 1 Reserved 1 0 0 0 Not used 0 1 1 0 Invalid Data signalling rate 0111111 Reserved 14 1 0 1 0 Reserved 110 o 14400 bitis 1101111 Rec V27 ter 29 DAAU v33 and V 17 1lolol1 9 600 bit s Notused 1 1 0 1 Not used 1 4 12 000 bitis 1 1 1 0 Reserved IUS 1 1 1 1 Reserved 1 0 11 1 rec V 17 1 1 0 0 Reserved 1 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 7 0 Reserved 1 1 1 1 Reserved 15 0 Invalid 4 R8 x 7 7 lines mm and or 200 x 200 pels 25 4 mm 16 0 Invalid 07 Invalid 1 Two dimensional coding capability 75 Two dimensional coding 227 magicolor 2590MF lt 25 lt 13 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007
244. e When checking the number of FAX printed pages produced 11 5 2 TOTAL SCAN Function Display the number of scans made Use When checking the number of scans made 25 lt 11 5 3 PRINTER JAM Function Displays the number of misfeeds that have occurred Use When checking for the number of misfeeds that have occurred 11 5 4 ADF JAM Function Displays the number of misfeeds that have occurred in the Auto Document Feeder Unit When checking for the number of misfeeds that have occurred in the Auto Document Use Feeder Unit 11 5 5 TROUBLE Function Displays the number of malfunctions detected Use When checking for the number of malfunctions detected 135 magicolor 2590MF O lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 6 DISPLAY 11 6 1 MAIN F W VER Function Displays the version of the controller firmware Use When upgrading the firmware When the image processing board has been replaced with a new one 11 6 2 ENGINE F W VER Function Displays the version of the engine firmware Use When the printer control board has been replaced with a new one 11 6 3 NIC F W VER Functi
245. e T30 protocol 4747 404000000 226 Troubleshooting 14 8 233 14 41 233 14 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 233 14 2 Sensorlayoutl n 234 14 3 eek end EROR ER hazed R A nace 235 1434 Initial 235 14 3 2 Misfeed at paper feed section 235 14 3 3 Misfeed at 2nd transfer section 236 14 3 4 Misfeed at fusing 237 14 3 5 Misfeed at exit section u u u 238 14 3 6 Undefined misfeed rrr terreri u eret 239 15 Error od65S 15 1 Trouble display 15 2 Trouble code 1156 terret t inten rr receipt 15 3 HOW IO 15 4 SolU lign a iced cen Ee E na d re en Hp i ied EE Ren 15 4 4 04H Printer control board malfunction 243 15 4 2 05H Flash ROM malfunction ni 243 15 4 8 08H Main motor 243 15 4 4 OBH Ventilation fan motor malfunction 244 15 4 5 Power supply cooling fan motor malfunction 244 15 4 6 10H Polygon motor
246. e processing board IPB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 1 Check the IPB connector for proper _ nection and correct as necessary 2 Change IPB 251 magicolor 2590MF D S Q 5 16 Power supply errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 16 Power supply errors 5 16 1 Machine is not energized at all PU operation check N 5 8 Relevant Electrical Parts g Power switch SW1 DC power supply1 DCPU1 Printer control board PRCB Location Step Check Item Electrical Result Action component 1 15 the power source voltage being applied to 0 6 NO Check wiring from power CN1DCPU1 on DCPU1 outlet to PG1 to CN1 2 dic F1 and F2 DCPU1 conduct _ NO Change DCPU1 DC24 V and 5 V being applied to Gs DCPU1 PJ2PRCB on the PRCB YES Change PRCB 16 2 Control panel indicators do not light Relevant Electrical Parts Image processing board IPB DC power supply1 DCPU1 Operation board Location Step Check Item Electrical Result Action component 1 Is the power source voltage being applied to J 6 NO Check wiring from power CN1DCPU1 on DCPU1 outlet to PG1 to CN1 2 ao F1 and F2 DCPU1 conduct _ NO Change DCPU1 3 lsP7IPB on IPB properly connected 1 10 NO Reconnect
247. e revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2007 08 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 CONTENTS Duplex Option General 1 Product Specifications 2 cs me Maintenance 2 Periodical ChK retreat 2 1 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 3 jul 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list essen 3 2 2 Cleaning parts 3 3 Disassembly Assembly 2 2 3 3 1 Duplex Option 3 3 2 COVER
248. e same outlet If used the risk of fire exists When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using a too long extension cord may result in fire Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up Fire may result 2 Installation Requirements Prohibited Installation Places NWARNING Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola tile materials that may catch fire Q A risk of fire exists UR Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain Q X lt A risk of fire and electric shock exists When not Using the Product for a long time NWARNING When the product is not used over an extended period of time holidays etc switch it off and unplug the power gt cord Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire S 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION The product generates ozone gas during operation but it will not be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases ventilate the room a When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b When taking a lot of copies c When using multiple products at the same time Stability CAUTION Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on
249. e scanning start position in the sub scanning direction Use When the original glass is replaced When the Scanner unit has been replaced NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjustment Specification Adjust the width of in the copy of the test pattern1 so that the following specification is met 20 2 5 lt 4139F3C547DA Adjustment Range 5 0 5 0 mm 0 0 mm 5 0 5 0 mm Step 0 5 mm Setting Procedure 1 Print the test pattern1 See P 137 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select CCD SUB REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern1 should be positioned vertically Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check that the width of C in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure Press the Menu Select key Using the A key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key Place the test pattern1 on the Original Glass Then make a test copy again and check it Adjustment Instructions If the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Increas
250. e the setting Ifthe width of in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width Decrease the setting 131 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 47 ADF SUB ZOOM To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by vary Function ing the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when using the Automatic Document Feeder When the original glass is replaced When new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted magicolor 2590MF Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOON adjustments have been performed Adjustment Range Setting Procedure See P 17 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual Adjustment Instructions 11 4 8 MAIN REGIST To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by vary Function ing the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when using the Automatic Document Feeder When the original glass is replaced When a new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed D After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjustment g Range 3 Setting See 18 of the Auto Docum
251. e to reinstall the protection film 11 Disconnect two connectors MPJ2 MPJ3 1 from the image processing board 12 Remove nine screws 1 and the left frame 2 79 magicolor 2590MF 7 gt magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 US 2 1 4139F2C541DA 4139F2C542DA 5 3 39 Speaker SP 1 Remove the right cover See P 32 4139F2C675DA 80 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Remove the screw 1 and remove the bracket 2 14 Remove the screw 3 and the ground 15 Remove the saddle 4 Then hold ing down the tabs remove the inlet assy N CAUTION NEVER unplug the faston terminals from the Inlet If the terminals are unplugged do not use the inlet assy Be sure to use a new inlet assy Inlet har nesses 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the wire saddle 2 3 Remove two screws 3 and remove the speaker 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 6 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 6 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by magicolor 2590MF Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance
252. eceive correct signal after sending ERR signal 0048 Did not receive correct signal after receiving PPS PRI or PRI EOR PRI Q 0049 Did not receive correct signal after sending PIP PIN signal within 13 sec 281 magicolor 2590MF a 5 Es magicolor 2590MF N 2 3 e 18 FAX error Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Code Possible Causes of Error 004A Line energy over threshold lasts for 60 seconds after MCF and can not detect FSK or carrier signal in ECM mode 0048 not detect correct FSK signal even though detected FSK tone within 6 sec 004C Handshake fail during re train or between page in V34 RX 004E Receive DCN signal after sending DIS V 34 004F Remote side disconnected after sending ANSam in V 8 phase 0050 Did not receive any correct signal after sending CJ signal in V 8 phase 0051 Did not receive phase 3 signal after phase 2 within 20 seconds in V 34 0052 Did not receive phase 4 signal after phase within 20 seconds V 34 0053 Modem disconnect after phase 4 in V 34 0054 Remote side disconnected after phase 4 in V 8 0055 Receive incorrect signal after sending DIS signal V 34 0056 Modem disconnect after sending CFR in V 34 0057 Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after s
253. ecessary 3 Check the PRCB connector for proper con u _ nection and correct as necessary 4 57 sensor check PRCB PJ6PRCB 3 ON C 7 5 1502 operation check PRCB PJ11PRCB 4 REM J to K 1 6 Change IPB 7 PROB D 2 5 237 14 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 14 3 5 Misfeed at exit section Detection timing wo Description 8 The exit sensor PS7 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a predetermined o Detection of _ period of time after it has been blocked by the paper misfeed at exit section The Paper exit tray full sensor PS11 is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the exit sensor PS7 has been blocked by the paper Detection of paper The exit sensor PS7 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON a cover is left in exit section opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Detection of paper loaded fully in exit section The exit tray full sensor PS11 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON a cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit sensor PS7 Printer control board PRCB Exit tray full sensor PS11 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal idis 1 Initial check items
254. ectrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 5 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list E No Section Part name Ref page a 1 Rollers Paper pick up roller 5 5 2 Tray P6 c Exterior parts 3 Rear cover 7 4 Lower Feeder unit 6 Units 5 Paper pick up unit P7 6 Board and etc PF drive board 7 Paper pick up solenoid 9 Other parts 8 Tray set detecting switch P 10 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list No Section Part name Ref page 1 Rollers Paper pick up roller P 10 7 2 3 8 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 3 1 Paper pick up roller 1 Remove the Lower Feeder Unit from the main body See 2 Remove two paper pick up rollers 1 ex 4056F2C501DA 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 2 Lower Feeder Unit N CAUTION Whenever removing or reinstalling the Lower Feeder Unit be sure first to unplug the power cord of the printer from the power outlet Lower Feeder Unit 1 Liftthe printer main body and then remove the Lower Feeder Unit 1 from the printer Maintenance 4056F2C502DA 1 Remove the Lower Feeder Unit from the main body 2 Slide out the tray 1 4056F2C503DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 4 Rear cover 1 Slide ou
255. ed DIS 1 No Continue start with 17 2 0 Delay time in primary channel for V 34 trans Symbol rate ms 100 300 500 1 mit after CFR or MCF Bit No 2 9 1 1 signal Bit No 1 0 0 T lt 206 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 40 SOFT SWITCH 40 2 Initial A Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E V 17 V 17 V 17 V 17 8 Speed bps 12200 9600 7200 0 Bit No 8 0 0 0 0 Bit No 7 0 0 0 0 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 Bit No 5 0 1 0 1 7 0 Speed bps V 29 V 29 V 27 V 27 ter V 17 RX start speed 9600 7200 4800 2400 Select receiving start Bit No 8 0 0 0 0 0 speed for V 17 Bit No 7 1 1 1 1 6 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 5 0 1 0 1 Speed Reserved Bit No 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 Bit No 7 1 1 1 0 Bit No 6 4 1 0 1 1 1 Bit No 5 4 Reserved Reserved 0 2 3 Speed bps V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 0 31200 28800 26400 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 5 2 V 34 RX start speed Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 E Prohibit V 34 mode Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 5 When upper speed loss Speed bps V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 24000 21600 19200 1
256. ed by the user CRU No Classification Part name Replacement cycle Ref Page 1 Write section window q Vhen amalfunction 7 occurs See 12 of the Auto 2 Paper feed roller 1 Document Feeder Unit service manual Auto Docu z See P 12 of the Auto 3 ment Feeder roller 1 malfunction Document Feeder Unit Unit service manual See P 13 of the Auto 4 Registration roller 3 Document Feeder Unit service manual 1 paper When a malfunction 5 feed section Paper feed roller 1 10 See P 10 of the 6 Tray paper Paper pick up roller 2 When s malfunction Lower Feeder Unit feed section occurs service manual Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 3 2 Concept of parts life Max printed Description Life Value pages image The period of time during which the main motor is gt e o re N e Drum cartridge energized is counted 4 500 prints Fusing unit The number of printed pages is counted 120 000 prints 2nd transfer roller The number of printed pages is counted 120 000 prints The period of time during which the main motor is Transfer belt unit energized or the number of printed pages which 135 000 pages ever reaches the life value first Toner cartridge The dot counter or the number of printed pages C M Y Bk whichever reaches the life value first
257. edure Step Section Check Item Result Action Connectors are securely connected with NO Reconnect PWBs and con i 1 no bent pins and no breaks in the connec Replace the connection nection cables tion cables cable 2 Scanner unit The exposure lamp comes on NO scanner unit 3 Connectors on the image processing NO Reconnect image process board are connected properly 4 ing board The problem has been eliminated after Change image process performing step 5 ing board D fe 256 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 2 A Typical faulty images 17 Miscellaneous errors Scanner system Low image density or rough image 403616403600 Troubleshooting procedure forming step 5 Step Section Check Item Result Action y Shading Shading sheet is dirty YES Clean sheet 2 Mirrors lens and or original glass are dirty YES Clean Original glass inf Clean 3 Scanner unit Exposure lamp is dirty YES Change scanner unit PWBs and Connectors are securely connected with no Reconnect 4 connection bent pins and no breaks in the connection NO Replace the connection cables cables cable 5 Connectors on the image processing board NO Reconnect Image pro are connected properly cessing board The problem has been eliminated afte
258. edure 1 V 17 Communication example PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME TMFP TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE JUN 10 2006 12 10 SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT 0001 Tx 001 ABC OCT 27 17 19 008 ooh00min03s OK 22345678901234567890 12 TX RX DATA NSF FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CSI FF 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 DIS FF 13 00 00 00 00 00 NSS FF 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D DCS FF 13 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TCF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 13 84 2 PIX FF 13 2F 00 00 41 MCG FF 13 8C 2 DCN FF 13 FB TRAINING PHASE DATA PHASE 4139F3C553DA 144 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 2 V 34 Communication example NAME TMFP TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE JUN 10 2006 12 10 PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT 0001 TX 001 27 17 19 008 00 00 035 ECM OK 22345678901234567890 12 TX RX DATA ANS CM JIM V 8 PROTOCOL DUMP pe NSF NSS FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CSI DCS FF 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
259. eed communication than level 1 for poor line condition 189 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 19 SOFT SWITCH 19 ape m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 8 Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 0 Bit No 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit No 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 CNG signal level 6 6 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 Bit No 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 5 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 10 1 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 level 2 Level dBm 72 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Eg BitNo 3 fay 0 0 0o0 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 lt 190 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 20 SOFT SWITCH 20 E
260. egister 1 Yes Bit 1 If machine name not registered the model name will print at the top of each receiv ing page The default is not to print base on custom ID Bit 2 Some country such as U S A PTT regulation must be send header at top of each page 210 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 47 SOFT SWITCH 47 E Initial 2 Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E 0 Reserved Reserved 0 Auto RX mode 6 RX mode 0 0 1 Manual RX mode 5 Footer 0 1 On Print footer information at each of received page Reserved Reserved Salm O A S O O O Bit 5 The footer shows machine number receiving time remote side TSI number ses sion and page number The details show on the report specification 12 3 48 SOFT SWITCH 48 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 0 No 8 Activity report 1 2 1 Yes o 7 0 Description ON OFF Reserved TX Result Report Bit No 7 0 1 1 A 6 Bit No 6 0 0 1 1 5 5 0 Description ON OFF Reserved RX Result Report Bit No 5 0 1 1 4 Bit No 4 0 0 1 1 3 Error report for I FAX 0 and Network scanner 1 Yes 8 If machine receive 0 Delete error Mail the 2 9 mail is deleted or 1 Keep k
261. ending CFR 0058 Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after modem enter to primary phase in V 34 005A can not detect any correct ECM frame within minutes in phase C 005 Did not detect phase 5 signal after primary channel within 6 seconds 005 Detect busy tone within control channel after phase C 0050 Modem can not detect any correct ECM frame with 12 Sec in phase C 005 Did not detect control channel signal after received RCP frame within 6 seconds 005 Did not detect silence after sending JM signal for polling TX function 0060 There are no bulletin files to be polled in V 34 0061 Machine can not detect V 21 or V 8 signal within 35 seconds 0062 Modem disconnect in phase D after our side sending out flag sequence in control channel 0063 Did not receive any flag sequence in control channel within 6 seconds in phase D 0064 Did not detect any control channel signal in phase D within 60 seconds even though energy still on the line 0065 Did not detect any control channel signal within 60 seconds after detect silence in phase D 0066 Did not receive T 30 signal or carrier signal after sending CFR in V 34 0070 User presses stop key during receiving 0071 Memory full during receiving 282 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 18 FAX error 18 4 2 Transmission Code Possi
262. ent 6 1 Leading edge skew adjustment NOTE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 This adjustment should be made when image skew occurs 4139F3C557DA 4139F3C558DA 4139F3C515DA 20 1 Print the test pattern See P 137 of the main body service manual Load the chart in the Auto Document Feeder Unit and make five 1 sided copies of the chart Align each copy sample as shown and check the deviation If the deviation is outside the speci fied range perform the adjustment below Specification 0 1 0 mm Loosen the one screw 1 in the back to the right Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F3C559DA 4139F3C560DA 6 Mechanical adjustment If the deviation is as shown to the left Move the graduations of the duplex ing document feeder to the front Tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 5 If the deviation is as shown to the left Move the graduations of the duplex ing document feeder to the back Tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 5 21 Auto Document Feeder Unit A 25 lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Auto Document Feeder Unit Blank Page T 2 lt 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 Jam display Troubleshooting 7 Jam display 7 1 Misfeed display Auto Document Feede
263. ent Feeder Unit service manual lt Procedure Adjustment Instructions 132 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 4 9 ADF SUB REGIST To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by vary Function ing the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when using the Automatic Document Feeder When the original glass is replaced When a new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted Use NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjustment Range Setting 4 i See P 19 of the Auto Document Feeder Unit service manual Procedure Adjustment Instructions 11 4 10 DMAX Function To adjust density of each color Setting The default setting is 0 procedure Adjustment range 1 6 0 8 0 0 8 1 6 11 4 11 1st TRANSFER VOLTAGE Function To adjust the voltage applied to the transfer roller for each color Use When adjusting density of each color The default setting is OV es Adjustment range 500V 500V P Step 50V 11 4 12 2nd TRANSFER VOLTAGE i Adjusts image characteristics according to user requirements for each type of media by Function varying the second transfer voltage To adjust the second transfer voltage when an image problem
264. epee 4 19 95 Blank Page Buljooyse qnosy Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications A Type Name Add on 500 sheet paper feed cassette Type Front loading type Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center B Paper Size A4 Letter Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Capacity 500 sheets C Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 supplied from the main unit DC5V 5 Max Power Consumption 12 W Dimensions 495 W x 581 D x 138 H mm 19 5 W x 22 75 x 5 5 D inch Weight 5 0 kg D Operating environment Temperature 10 to 35 50 to 95 F with a fluctuation of 10 C 18 F or less per hour Humidity 15 to 85 with a fluctuation of 20 h NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 5 ED E o o a 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Periodic check Maintenance 2 Periodic check 21 Maintenance procedure Periodic parts check Lower Feeder Unit Periodically replaced parts are not employed 7 2 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 4 Disa
265. ept 1 Reserved Reserved 0 If resetting Delete the mail will be deleted on POPS server If setting Keep the mail will be kept on POP3 server 211 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 49 SOFT SWITCH 49 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX g 8 Reserved Reserved 7 0 Print RX Mailbox 0 Base on RX RESULT REPORT setting 0 Report method 1 Always printing 5 Re dial method if 0 Re dial again 0 Comm Fail 1 Base on re dial time interval 4 No of rings 1 374 75 76 7 7 8 0 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 3 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 Bit No 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 No of rings 1 2 of rings 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 12 3 50 SOFT SWITCH 50 5 2 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit Transmit or cancel 0 Cancel and print out report 8 aftertime out in Mem DG 0 ory TX 1 Transmission 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 Bit 8 Can select cancel this job and print out report or start to send in case of time when memory full condition occ
266. eting area 2 Austria Belgium Brazil Canada E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 1 2 314 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81112 314 5 617 81112 31415 6 7 8 39 100000001000000010000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 43 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 44 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 45 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 46 01010000 0101000001010000 01010001 47 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 48 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 49 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 50 51 52 53 54 00010101 0001010100010101 00010101 55 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 56 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 o 57 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 5 58 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 P 59 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 2 60 0000000010000000000000000 00000000 8 61 11110000111110000111110000 11110000 lt 62 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 63 0000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 1 64 o0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 156 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set C Market area 3 Marketing area C
267. etting is OFF procedure ON Sensor not supporting RoHS OFF Sensor supporting RoHS 11 4 15 FLICKER SPECIAL Eliminates flickers of a room fluorescent light when it occurs due to power source use environment or similar reason Use Use when the fluorescent light flickers due to power source use environment or similar reason Setting The default setting is OFF procedure ON OFF 11 4 16 SERIAL NO Function Input machine serial number 8 digits range from 00000001 to 99999999 Use Once the serial number is specified SERIAL NO on the 2 ADJUST menu cannot be set again 134 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 5 COUNTER 11 5 1 TOTAL PRINT A MONO COPY Function Displays the number of monochrome copies made magicolor 2590MF Use When checking the number of monochrome copies made B COLOR COPY Function Displays the number of color copies made Use When checking the number of color copies made C MONO PRINT Function Displays the number of monochrome printed pages produced Use When checking the number of monochrome printed pages produced D COLOR PRINT Function Displays the number of color printed pages produced Use When checking the number of color printed pages produced E FAX PRINT Function Displays the number of FAX printed pages produced Us
268. evised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2007 08 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 CONTENTS magicolor 2590MF Main body General 1 System configuration 2 Product Specifications nieto rita a rri ero 2 24 Fax Specifications 5 Maintenance 3 Periodic CHOGCK quM 7 3 4 Maintenance 5 7 3 1 1 Replacement parts 2 7 3 1 2 Cleaning 8 3 2 Concept f paris 9 3 3 Maintenance 111 10 3 3 1 10 3 3 2 PH eo 12 3 3 3 Toner cartridge C M Y K ua 13 3 3 4 Drum 16 3 3 5 belt bita e dior reperti er i Eher entr 17
269. field 4 With 0 Invalid 0 Invalid i HKM key management capacity EC HKM Key management selec Q Invalid 07 Invalid 82 RSA key management capacity E RSA key management selec 83 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 17 Override mode capacity 17 Override mode function 84 0 Invalid 07 Invalid 17 HFX40 code capacity 1 HFX40 code selection 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 85 1 Alternative code number 2 1 Alternative code number 2 capacity selection 0 Invalid 86 Invalid 1 Alternative code number 1 Alternative code number 3 capacity selection 87 0 Invalid 07 Invalid HFX40 1 hashing capacity 4 HFX40 1 hashing selection 0 Without 88 Extend field 4 With 0 2 Invalid 0 Invalid 89 1 Alternative hashing system number 2 capacity hashing system number 2 selection Q Invalid 07 Invalid ao 1 Alternative hashing system number capacity hashing system number 3 selection 91 Reserved 92 0 Invalid 17 T 44 Mixed raster content mode 93 0 Invalid 17 T 44 Mixed raster content mode 94 0 Invalid 1 T 44 Mixed raster content mode 95 0 Invalid 1 Page length maximum strip size for T 44 Mixed raster content 0 Without 96 Extend field 4 With 231 magicolor 2590MF
270. g procedure 2 3 4139F3C550DA lt B PATTERN2 Function To print the test pattern for halftones and gradations When checking density and pitch irregularities use When checking reproducibility of gradations 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select the PATTERN2 3 Press the B amp W start key to print the test pattern Setting procedure 4139F3C551DA 137 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 73 ADF FEED TEST S To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections in the Automatic Function e Document Feeder o 8 Use When a document misfeed occurs Setting 1 Load paper into the Automatic Document Feeder procedure 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding 11 7 4 COPY ADF GLASS AREA Function To check for dirt the scanning section of the Automatic Document Feeder Use If spots appear in the copies 1 Load A4S or LetterS paper into Tray1 2 Press the Start key to start the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function Setting 3 Two copy samples are fed out 4 Check that no spots appear in the copy samples 5 Press the Stop key to stop the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function procedure 11 75 MOVE TO HOME Function Moves the scanner unit to its home position for locking Use
271. gnal level criteria 1 Sent N G page 8 Send out NSF frame with station ID 7 Number of Pause within phone number 03 6 Re dial prohibit for ANSWER 4 3 2 1 RX level setting 4 Visible alarm for RTN signal 04 3 Audible alarm for RTN signal P178 1 Polarity change detection 8 7 Push Button ON OFF Timing PB 05 6 5 Relation between 10 key amp No of dial pulse 179 4 3 2 1 Dial pulse make ratio select adjust MR 8 7 on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle 06 4 3 Ring off at 1st cycle to approve incoming ring P 180 2 1 Pulse cycle to approve ring frequency 8 Dial tone or busy tone detection 7 PSTN PBX setting 07 6 PBX dial tone detect P 181 5 Dial mode select 4 3 2 1 TX Level select for PSK FSK 8 Sending RTN signal level lt lt 7 Detect busy tone after dialing 08 P 182 6 Sending CED signal after connection 4 3 2 1 Re dial interval 8 7 Ringer frequency detection 09 5 TSI CSI append P183 2 1 Time from RX DIS signal to send DCS signal 8 Print out RTN page report 7 Confirmation report result field 6 5 Get gap time between digit for pulse dial RX PIP T 30 command after send out MPS command P 184 Received DIS signal within reception 10 Transmission time limitation Audio alarm after communicatio
272. gt OF OF Al Al o oj oj gt CO OF ojoj A oj OF oj A 9 OF OF gt CO oj S Of CO OF OF Al oj 9 OF OF OF gt OF Al oj oj OC CO OF 9 9 9 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF CO CO CO O o O OF O OF OF O OF Al Oj O O OF 0 0 0 Of Of CO OF gt OF Al Al OF OF j l OF OF OF o A o CO OF A OF OF Al CO O Oj 9 OF OF OF Al OF Al CO CO oj O Oj OF OF Oj 9 OF OF OF CO O OF OF oj CO Oj jO OF OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF Al Oj OF 0 gt A oj Of 9 0 9 OF 9 OF OF 9 OF oj OF gt OF 9 OF OF OF OF A A oO N OF OF OF OF OF Al OF OF OF OF OF OF oj OF OF Al 0 oj
273. gt OF OF OF OF OF OF O O O P RTPa U U O OF OF A O O O 9 CO CO O T gt 9 9 9 9 OF 090 OF O 9 O o gt oO oO OF OF Of A CO OF CO O CO OF OF CO OF OF A CO A OS o CO OC OO OF OF OF OF gt OS OF OF OF Of OF OF OF gt OF OF OF CO OF CO OF SH CO OO oO Alo Oo Of Of OJ OF OF OF CO gt OF OF OF CO OF OF A CO Al Of CO Of OJ OF OF OF OF OF gt Al oly oy oO Oo OF OF OF SA OF OF OF A gt Alo 0 153 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Marketing area United Kingdom Argentina Australia Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 Soft Switch No zio gt OF OF OF GO OF Of OF OF OF OF oja oj O O O OF 9 O O O O O CO O OL 0 0 0 A 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
274. gt CO CO CO OJ JO O OF OF Al O O O O O O O O O O O O O OF OF O CO O oj oj CO S O O O SA OF OF CO 9 OF AL oo oj ojoj gt S CO OF CO CO 9 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF Sl 9 OF OF OF OF OF OF CO Of o CO CO OF gt OF OF CO OF OF OF Of oj CO OF 9 9 OF OF 9 OF OF oj CO OF Al 9 9 OF OF CO CO 171 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 fit Marketing area 2 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan E Soft Switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 5 11213415167 8111231415 617 81112 314 516 7181112 3415 6 7 8 39 100000001000000010000000 1 0000000 40 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 41 00000000 0000000000000000 00000000 42 00000000 0000000000000000 00000
275. heck Item Result Action 1 image check Does a blank print occur YES Cheese FH uni connector for proper connection Is the gear of the drum cartridge Check or correct the drive trans 2 drive mechanism installed prop NO mitting section or replace the erly drum cartridge Drum cartridge Is the charge corona voltage con tact or photo conductor ground Check clean or correct the con contact of the drum cartridge con tact nected properly Is the connector connected prop 4 High voltage unit erly Replace the high voltage unit Have steps 1 4 eliminated the Replace the printer control problem board Replace the PH unit D fe 274 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 20 Incorrect color image registration A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 4036fs4032c0 B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Is the transfer belt dirty with fin YES Clean gerprints or oil Wipe the surface clean of dirt with 2 Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer Transfer belt unit belt with a new transfer belt unit 3 Is the drive coupling to the YES Clean machine dirty 4 isthe 2nd transter roller diriy r YES Replace the 2nd transfer rolle
276. hina Czech Denmark Europe Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 Soft Switch No S z A magicolor 2590MF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 lt o Of OF OF S OF gt OF OF OF OF OF gt A oj CO gt CO CO OF Al 9 oj CO OF Al OF OF OF oj S Of CO CO oj oj OF OF OF Al Al oj oj 9 9 OF 9 9 OF 9 OF OF OF gt Al Al S oo oj o Oj OF Oj OF OF 9 O CO O O CO OF OF OF OF OF OF Al O OF Al O O 0 0 oj oj O JO OF A OF ALO Al OF OF 9 OF 0 o A A O oj OF O OF 9 O
277. host for the procedure SMTP server 8 13 4 SMTP PORT NO Function This function is used to enter the port number 1 to 65535 for the SMTP server NOTE Use Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the port number to use Setting The port number be set between 1 and 65535 procedure Normally port number 25 is used 8 13 5 SMTP TIMEOUT Function This function is used to specify the length of time in seconds before the connection to Use the SMTP server times out 30 to 300 seconds Setting The default setting is 60 procedure The time out period can be between 30 and 300 seconds 105 magicolor 2590MF E lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 13 6 TEXT INSERT 2 Function This function is used to specify whether or not to insert text explaining that an image has Use been attached to an e mail message when sending scan data as an E mail attachment 8 The default setting is OFF Setting ON OFF procedure ON If ON is selected the following text is inserted in the e mail message OFF If OFF is selected a blank e mail message will be sent 8 137 DEFAULT SUBJECT Function This function is used to specify the default subject line when sending scan data as an e Use mail attachment Setting The default se
278. id pe 1 Mixed mode 63 Set to 0 0 Without 64 Extend field 1 With 65 0 Invalid 175 Processable mode 26 66 0 Invalid 1 Digital network capability 67 Duplex and half 0 Half duplex operation only 0 Half duplex operation only duplex capabilities 1 Duplex and half duplex operation 1 Duplex operation 0 Invalid 58 1 JPEG coding 07 Invalid p Full color mode 0 Invalid 18 1 Preferred Huffmann tables 71 0 Invalid 12 bit pixel element 0 Without 72 Extend field 4 With 73 Invalid 1 No sampling 1 1 1 74 0 Invalid 1 Nonstandard radiation light 75 0 Invalid 1 Nonstandard is mute range 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 76 1 North American Letter 215 9 mm x 279 4 mm capac 1 North American Letter 215 9 ity mm x 279 4 mm 230 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Fax Protocols Designation DIS DTC DCS 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 77 1 North American Legal 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm capac 1 North American Legal 215 9 ity mm 355 6 mm 0 Invalid Ir Invalid 12 17 Single layer sequential encoding basic capacit single lay q g pacity ing basic 79 0 Invalid 17 Single layer sequential encoding optional LO capacity 0 Without 80 Extend
279. ield Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 3 6 CNG LEVEL Function Calling tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 11 dBm us e o tO 9 17 to 12 dBm 11 dBm 10 to 2 dBm 11 3 7 CED LEVEL Function Answer tone output level Use Setting The default setting is 11 dBm procedure 17 to 12 dBm 44 dBm 10 to 2 dBm 11 3 8 ECM MODE Function Select error correction mode Use The default setting is ON Setting ON When an error occurs during communication re send the frame where the procedure error occurs OFF Any error is ignored during communication 11 3 9 CODING SCHEME Function 5 Select compression method in TX RX mode Use The default setting is JBIG lt MMR Acompression method Setting MR compression method MH The simplest compression method JBIG The most complex compression method that generates the smallest code than any of following ones 124 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 3 10 TONER EMPTY REPORT Function Select to generate a report to a specific destination when toner empty status occurs in Use the engine The default setting is OFF ON Generate a report to report destination OFF Not to generate report
280. ill display the menu of the following functions lt gt This function becomes available only when the optional tray2 is mounted on the machine Menu Mode MACHINE SETTING 1 AUTO PANEL RESET 86 2 86 3 LCD CONTRAST P 86 4 LANGUAGE P 86 5 LAMP OFF TIME P 86 6 BUZZER VOLUME 87 7 INITIAL MODE P 87 8 TONER EMPTY STOP P 87 9 TONER NEAR EMPTY P 87 10 AUTO CONTINUE P 87 11 CALIBRATION P 88 12 REMOTE MONITOR P 88 PAPER SOURCE SETUP TRAY1 PAPER PLAIN PAPER TRANSPARENCY LABELS LETTERHEAD ENVELOP POSTCARD THICK STOCK GLOSSY TRAY2 PAPER lt gt 89 COPY SETTING 1 MODE P 90 2 DENSITY LEVEL A P 90 3 DENSITY LEVEL M P 90 4 COLLATE P 90 5 QUALITY P 90 6 PAPER PRIORITY P 91 FAX REGISTRATION 1 ONE TOUCH DIAL P 91 2 SPEED DIAL P 91 3 GROUP DIAL P 91 TX SETTING 1 SCAN DENSITY P 92 2 RESOLUTION P 92 3 HEADER P 92 83 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T O lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Menu Mode RX SETTING 1 MEMORY RX MODE P 93 2 of RINGS P 93 3 REDUCTION RX P 93 4 RX PRINT P 97 5 RX MODE P 98
281. image process ing board could result Open the Auto Document Feeder Unit Remove the screw 1 While inserting a pin or similar object into the hole 2 remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit 3 NOTE Make the following adjustments when anew Auto Document Feeder Unit has been mounted Make a leading edge skew adjust ment See P 20 Perform ADF SUB ZOOM See P 17 Perform CD REGIST See P 18 Perform FD REGIST See P 19 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 4 Top cover 2 4139F2C635DA 3 3 5 Rear cover 1 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See P8 2 4139F2C636DA 3 Other 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove two screws 1 and the top cover 2 2 Open the top cover 3 Remove the screw 1 and unhook the eight tabs 2 Then remove the rear cover 3 Auto Document Feeder Unit 7 i s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 6 Document feeder tray 1 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See 2 Open the top cover 3 Remove the rear cover Auto Document Feeder Unit 4 Remove two screws 1 and the doc ument feeder tray 2 4139F2C637DA 3 3 7 DF control board 5 2 1 Remove the Auto Document Feeder Unit See 8 2 Open the top cover 3 Remove the rear cover See 9 2 1 4 Disconnect the seven connectors
282. ing the shaft 1 on both sides of the toner cartridge with the rails in the machine install the toner car tridge 2 5 Press down on the toner cartridge until it snaps 1 into place 6 Close the front cover 7 Close the top cover 15 magicolor 2590MF 7 2 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 3 Periodic check 3 3 4 Drum cartridge A Replacement procedure 4139F2C514DA 2 Open the top cover See P 31 4139F2C523DA 4139152538 0 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 the lever 1 and swing open the IR unit 2 NOTE Note that the IR unit cannot be swung up with the Auto Document Feeder Unit in its raised position 3 Hold onto the handle 2 of the drum cartridge 1 and slowly lift the drum cartridge out of the machine NOTE Position the removed drum car tridge as shown in the illustration at the left Be sure to keep the drum cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty Do not leave the drum cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes and do not place the removed drum cartridge in a location where it will be exposed to direct light such as sunlight 4 Toreinstall reverse the order of removal Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Periodic check 3 3 5 Transfer belt unit LL A Replacement procedure 5 1 the lever 1
283. ion Electrical Control Signal component Check the fusing unit for correct installation 1 As whether it is secured in position Check the fusing unit DCPU1 and PRCB 2 for proper connection and correct as nec essary D a Check the lever of the safety switch and correct as necessary Change the fusing unit Change PRCB Change DCPU1 248 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 Error codes 15 4 16 21H Faulty OHP sensor Relevant Electrical Parts OHP sensor PS2 Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM magicolor 2590MF Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 1 Check the PRCB connector for proper con m EN nection and correct as necessary 2 52 sensor check PRCB PJ12PRCB 6 ON Jto K 1 3 PRCB 15 4 17 23H Faulty waste toner near full detection board Relevant Electrical Parts Waste toner near full detect board LED Printer control board PRCB WTDTB LED Drum cartridge WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electrical component Step Action Control Signal Check the WTDTB LED connector for 1 proper connection and correct as neces sary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 3 Change the drum cartridge 4
284. is not blocked even after the lapse of a predeter option paper feed mined period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started Section The transport sensor PS3 is not blocked even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started B Action Relevant electrical parts Paper loop sensor PS1 AD drive board ADDB Transport sensor PS3 Printer control board PRCB Transport motor M1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Initial check items Check the PS1 sensor ADDB J3ADDB 3 ON G 4 Check the PS3 sensor ADDB PJ5ADDB 3 B 4 4 M1 for correct operation ADDB Te Re 1164 B 4 Pulse Output Change ADDB Change PRCB EE fe E c a 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Error codes 5 Error codes 5 1 Trouble code 5 1 1 Trouble code list Code Item Detection Timing fan motenmaltune The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter OFH a e ing mined consecutive period of time while the power ply cooling fan motor remains energized 5 2 How to reset To reset the printer after a malfunction has occurred turn the power switch OFF and then ON again 5 3 Solution 5 3 1 OFH Duplex cooling fan motor malfunction Rele
285. itions are not a predetermined value while the rack motor is turning 241 magicolor 2590MF S 5 magicolor 2590MF D a 15 Error codes Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Code Item Detection Timing The thermistor does not detect a predetermined tem perature value even after the lapse of a predetermined Heating roller warm up fail A 18H period of time after the current warm up cycle has been ure started and the current warm up cycle is thus not com pleted Abnormally low heating The temperature detected by the thermistor remains 19H roller lower than a predetermined value for a predetermined temperature period of time Abnormally high heating The temperature detected by the thermistor is a prede 1AH roller termined value or higher for a predetermined period of temperature time The condition of a temperature rise of less than 1 C 1BH Faulty thermistor extends continuously for a predetermined period of time that begins when the warm up cycle is started Itis determined that the OHP sensor is faulty through SH sensor check made at the end of the predrive e Itis determined that the LED and photo receiver are Faulty waste toner near full 23H faulty through a check made when a new drum car detection board N
286. ld Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 8 SOFT SWITCH Refer the chapter of soft switch for the explanation of soft switch S See P 148 i SERVICE MODE 6 SOFT SWITCH 6 SOFT SWITCH gt 01 10000000 Bit 12345678 4139F3E529DA 11 8 1 KEY DEFINITION FOR SOFT SWITCH Key Definition Soft Switch Number Forward A Soft Switch Number Backward gt Bit No Forward lt Bit No Backward 1or0 Bit No is changed Menu Select The setting value of Soft Switch Number is defined 11 9 REPORT 11 9 1 SERVICE DATA LIST Function Print service data list report and Error log history list Service Data list includes the following items SOFT SWITCH COMMUNICATION HISTORY amp COUNTER ADJUST RXIN MEMORY MAIN RAM SIZE Use ROM ID 2 lt Error log history list includes the following items Index Index number from 0 9999 Error Error code number Maker NSF frame maker code Tell Remote side or TX side telephone number for that transaction 1 Enter the SERVICE MODE 2 Select REPORT and press the Menu Select key 3 Select SERVICE DATA LIST and press the Menu Select key Setting procedure 140 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 SERVICE DATA LIST example 11 SERVICE MODE NAME TEL X DATE JUN 05 2006 13 58
287. ld Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 Error codes 15 4 Solution 15 4 1 04H Printer control board malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Printer control board PRCB gt e o re N e WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electrical component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the PRCB connector for proper _ nection and correct as necessary 2 PRCB 15 4 2 05 Flash ROM malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location Electrical component Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 2 PRCB 15 4 3 08H Main motor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Main motor M1 Printer control board PRCB DC power supply1 DCPU1 WIRING DIAGRAM D Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component 9 1 Check the M1 connector for proper con 8 nection and correct as necessary 2 Check M1 for proper drive coupling and _ _ correct as necessary 3 Check the PRCB connector for proper con _ _ nection and correct as necessary PRCB PJ8PRCB 5 REM 4 M1 operation check PRCB PJ8PRCB 8 LOCK 4 5 Change PRCB 6 Change DCPU1 243 magicolor 2590MF D
288. ld Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 6 Scanner system White streaks or bands A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 403615402100 403615402200 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original z Shading Shading sheet is dirty YES Clean sheet 3 Mirrors Lens Mirrors lens and or original glass are YES Clean Original glass dirty Clean 4 Scanner unit Exposure lamp is dirty YES Change scanner unit D 2 5 261 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 7 Scanner system Uneven pitch A Typical faulty images magicolor 2590MF 4040F4C500DA B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action orrect or change drive 1 Scanner motor Scanner motor drive is being transmitted NO u 6 ge coupling mechanism Scanner unit Exposure lamp harness is not hooked NO Correct 3 Scanner rails Scanner rails are scratched or dirty NO Clean or Change Connectors are securely connected with no Reconnect PWBs and con 4 bent pins and no breaks in the connection NO Replace the connection nection cables cables cable Connectors on the image processing board 5 NO Reconnect Image process connected proper
289. lid s Metric based resolution preferred Do ot care E cp 0 T1542 T7 7 Do not care ime capability for Juan T454 1 2T 7 7 higher resolutions 0 Invalid 47 17 Selective polling DIS Selective polling transmission Set 0 DTC 0 Without 48 Extend field 4 With 0 Invalid 07 Invalid 4 Sub Addressing transmission 0 Invalid 50 1 Password Sender Identification capability DIS Password transmission DTC 0 Invalid 4 Sender Identification transmis sion 1 Binary File Transfer 07 Invalid at 1 Ready to transmit a data file polling ls 52 Set to 0 53 0 Invalid 229 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 13 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 us Designation DIS DTC DCS 54 0 Invalid 1 Document Transfer Mode DTM 55 0 Invalid 1 EDIFACT Transfer EDI 0 Without 56 Extend field 4 With 57 0 Invalid 1 Basic Transfer Mode BTM 58 Setto 0 0 Invalid 59 17 Ready to transmit a character or mixed mode Set to 0 ment polling 60 0 Invalid 75 Character mode 61 Set 0 0 Inval
290. llaneous malfunctions a 20 6 1 List of miscellaneous 20 6 2 Duplex size Type nenne nennen 20 5 2 Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications A Type Name Duplex Option Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Installation Mounted on the right side door of main unit Reversing System Exit Roller switchback Conveyance system Rubber roller driven rolls Document Alignment Center B Paper type Paper Size A4 Letter Legal i s 2 Paper Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib C Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 supplied from the main unit DC 5 V 5 supplied from the main unit Max Power Consumption 42W Dimensions 370 W x 153 D x 318 H mm 14 25 W x 6 D x 12 75 H inch Weight Approx 2 4 kg 5 25 Ib D Operating environment Temperature 10 to 35 50 to 95 F with a fluctuation of 10 18 F or less per hour Humidity 15 to 85 with a fluctuation of 20 h NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 2 x a 3 a 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 x
291. lt setting ON or OFF for adding the header Use date sent sender s name and fax number etc when sending faxes The default setting is ON ON Add header OFF No header NOTE For USA CANADA KOREA Header print is set ON and setting change to OFF by the user is not allowed The contents of registration TX data and time A Transmitter s own Setting Transmitter s own tel number procedure Session number Page number Total page number only displayed by use the memory TX job It is selectable by soft switch to transmit only pages which have failed to transmit if com munication error occurs on the way transmitting document In this case page number on Header Print is continued from the page number of the document successfully trans mitted Whether user setting is allowed or not is selectable with Soft switch Attaching Header Print Image within 4 mm 1 4 in top margin of transmitting document is not transmitted and Header print data is attached 92 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode 87 RX SETTING 8 7 1 MEMORY RX MODE Function This function can be used to set whether to allow ON memory reception not OFF In cases when confidential faxes are being received the received document can be stored in the memory and printed at a specified time or when memory reception is set to Use OFF A password can be set to
292. ly 6 ing board The problem has been eliminated after per NO Change image processing forming step 5 board D f 262 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 2 8 White lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines in FD and colored bands in FD A Typical faulty images White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands FD magicolor 2590MF 403619402100 403615402200 40361640230 403615402400 Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge face 2 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean Is the connector or contact termi 3 nal of the drum cartridge con NO nected properly Clean the contact terminal or reconnect the connector Is the connector or contact termi Clean the contact terminal or 4 nal of the PH unit connected NO PH unit erly reconnect the connector 5 Is the window surface dirty YES Clean Is the transfer belt dirty with fin gerprints or oil Rep Clean Wipe the surface clean of dirt with Is the transfer belt dirty or YES a soft cloth scratched Replace the scratched transfer belt with a new transfer belt unit 7 Transfer belt unit Eje end transfer rollerdiiy o
293. m battery replace it with a new lith ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied e g optical lamp and fixing lamp be sure to check the installa tion state A risk of fire exists e Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product e g for clearing media jam Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire POO S 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING Make sure that all screws components wiring connec tors etc that were removed for safety check and mainte nance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay special attention to forgotten connectors pinched cables mr forgotten screws etc d A risk of product trouble electric shock and fire exists Handling of Consumables NWARNING Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or
294. me during predrive The retraction position sensor cleaning blade is in the blocked state even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time during predrive The retraction position sensor cleaning blade is not unblocked blade in the retracted position within a pre determined period of time after the retraction sequence of the cleaning blade has been started The retraction position sensor cleaning blade is not blocked blade in the pressed position within a prede termined period of time after the pressure sequence of the cleaning blade has been started 16H Transfer belt rotation failure The belt positioning sensor does not detect the transfer belt position detection hole a second time even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has detected one while the transfer belt is rotated 17H Rack rotation failure The rack positioning sensor is in the blocked state when the rack motor remains deenergized The rack positioning sensor is not blocked a second time even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has been blocked once while the rack motor remains energized The rack positioning sensor is unable to detect the deceleration control position after the lapse of a given period of time after the rack motor has started while the rack motor is turning The count value of the edge of ON signal of the rack positioning sensor during each developing pos
295. mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 1 110110 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 1 1 1 0 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 ae 0 Without 24 Extension field 1 With 25 Reserved 26 0 Invalid 1 Un compressed mode 0 Invalid 27 ECM e Frame size 0 256 octets 28 Frame size 1 64 octets 29 Set 0 30 Set to 0 228 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 13 Fax Protocols Address DIS PSA NE Designation DIS DTC DCS 31 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 17 T 6 coding capability 1 T 6 coding enabled 0 Without 32 Extend field 4 With 33 0 Invalid 17 Field not valid capability 0 Invalid Multiple selective polling capability See 0 Invalid 35 1 Polling sub address transmission DTC by Polled Sub Set to 0 49 t Sub Addressing capability 0 Invalid 36 T 43 coding 0 Invalid d Plane interleave 38 Set to 0 39 Set to 0 0 Without 40 Extend field 4 With 41 0 Invalid 1 R8 x 15 4 lines mm 42 0 Invalid 17 300 x 300 pels 25 4 mm 43 0 Invalid 17 R16 x 15 4 lines mm and or 400 x 400 pels 25 4 mm 0 Invalid Resolution type selection 44 N 0 metric based resolution 1 Inch based resolution preferred pee inch based resolution 0 Inva
296. mm to 355 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 356 mm to 654 mm Divide into 2 pages ON 655 mm to 678 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 679 mm to 977 mm Divide into pages 978 mm or more Divide into pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 8 7 4 RX PRINT Function This function can be used to set whether the fax is only printed after all document pages have been received MEMORY RX or printing begins as soon as the first page of the Use document is received PRINT RX The default setting is MEMORY RX Setting procedure MEMORY RX Printed after all document pages have been received PRINT RX Printing begins as soon as the first page of the document is received 97 magicolor 2590MF E lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 7 5 RX MODE Function This function can be used to set the reception mode to automatic reception AUTO RX or manual reception MANUAL RX Automatic reception Automatically begins receiving after the set number of rings us e o tO 9 Use Manual reception Does not automatically receive the fax Reception begins after mak ing a connection by picking up the telephone receiver or pressing the On hook key then pressing the Start key The default setting is AUTO RX Setting procedure AUTO RX Automatic reception MAN
297. motor See P 60 4139F2C581DA 70 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Remove the screw 1 unlock the tab 2 and remove the wiring saddle 3 Then remove the shield 4 N CAUTION When reinstalling the shield make sure that no part of the harness is wedged in the mechanism 3 Remove the screw 1 and the tray1 paper pick up solenoid 2 2 Remove the tab 1 and the guide 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F2C582DA 4139152067 1 5 Other 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 Then remove the registration roller solenoid 3 Precaution for reinstallation Reinstall the solenoid so that the clearance between the gear of the registration roller clutch and flap per falls within the specified range Specifications 1 0 0 2 mm 5 3 33 Pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 503 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 4139F2C553DA 2 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 71 magicolor 2590MF 7 i 5 Other magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C562DA 4 Remove the speaker See P 80 4139F2C563DA 4139F2C584DA 72 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 5 Remove nine screws 1 and the right frame 2 6 Remove the screw 1 and discon
298. move two screws 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the developing motor 3 4139F2C599DA 67 magicolor 2590MF 5 5 Other 5 3 29 Scanner motor M5 1 Remove the IR unit See P 50 2 Remove the original glass unit See 34 4139F2C632DA 4139F2C629DA 1 4139F2C630DA 68 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Peel off the mylar 1 4 Remove two screws 1 and the scanner motor assy 2 5 Remove two screws 1 and the scanner motor 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 30 IR cooling fan motor FM3 1 Remove the rear cover See P 31 4139F2C618DA 3 1 4139F2C620DA 5 Other 2 Remove two screws 1 and the IR cooling fan motor cover 2 NOTE When reinstalling the IR cooling fan motor assy pass the harness through the guide 3 Remove two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 Then remove the IR cooling fan motor assy 3 4 Remove two screws 1 and the IR cooling fan motor 2 69 magicolor 2590MF 7 2 i s gt magicolor 2590MF 5 Other 5 3 31 1 paper pick up solenoid SD1 1 Remove the high voltage unit See 44 4139F2C586DA 5 3 32 Registration roller solenoid SD2 7 Remove the power supply cooling fan
299. n fail Detect dial tone after pre fix number Pulse dial allowed to select 11 P 185 Protocol signal Display mode high frequency dB value ala oa x sa of 149 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 Soft Switch Bit No Designation Page No 8 ECM mode capability 716 V 34 fall back counter for V 34 TX 12 5 Send CTC after 4th PPR 185 3 Send EOR after lowest speed 2 1 TCF transmission timing after DCS signal magicolor 2590MF 8 MR capability for G3 7 6 Delay time between transaction Super fine printing capability for receiving 13 4 Disable ultra fine capability in RX mode 186 DTS mode Send DTC signal if RX DIS signal in polling RX mode 2 no function on G4 6 Memory size level To RX 14 187 3 21 between V 34 ANSam signal and FSK DIS signal 8 IPSEL1 15 7 DCSEL 187 6 DCLIM 16 2 1 Fax communication coding method P 188 6 CED frequency 17 5 4 3 between off hook and CED signal P 188 2 1 Inactivity timer T5 m 6 5 G3 mode training quality level 18 189 4 3 2 1 re dial attempts counter 8 7 6 5 signal level 5 19 190 4 3 2 1 DTMF high frequency level 20 5 4 3 2 1 Re dial interval P 191 lt 8 NSS signal before DCS 7 6 CNG sending duration after dialing 21 5 T4 timer
300. n station The contents of ONE TOUCH DIAL or SPEED DIAL 91 magicolor 2590MF E lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 2 lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 6 TX SETTING 8 6 1 SCAN DENSITY Function This function can be used to set the default scanning contrast level to one of three set tings between LIGHT and DARK Use For dark colored paper media select a setting towards LIGHT For faint or colored text select a setting toward DARK Setting The default setting is eee LIGHT 1 4 DARK 8 6 2 RESOLUTION Function This function can be used to set the default scanning resolution image quality to one of the following Standard Fine Super Fine Half Tone Standard Half Tone Fine Use or Half Tone Super Fine The default setting is STD STD For documents containing normal text such as handwriting Standard FINE For documents containing small text Setting S F For documents such as newspapers or those containing detailed illustra procedure tions Super Fine H T For documents with shades such as photos Half Tone NOTE If H T was selected a screen appears allowing you to select a detailed setting STD FINE or S F 8 6 3 HEADER Function This function can be used to set the defau
301. nd within communication 4 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 0 0 4 high frequency 0 Base on SW19 1 4 0 dB value 1 High 1 dB Bit 6 If this bit set to 1 not allowed user to select pulse dial and this function open ser viceman to change Bit 7 Bit set to 1 LCD will show the command between each party the detail specifica tion see service mode specification 12 3 42 SOFT SWITCH 12 2 Initial 9 Bit Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 1 Yes 8 mode capability 1 E 0 No also disable V 34 modem capability 7 V 34 fall back counter Counter 2 2 for V 34 TX Bit No 7 0 1 1 6 Bit No 6 1 0 1 0 5 Send CTC after 4th 0 Send CTC Continue To Correct PPR 1 Send EOR End Of Transmission 4 Reserved Reserved 0 Send EOR after low 0 Send DCN Re dial 0 est speed 1 Send EOR_xxx Germany PTT 0 2 TCF transmission tim Desstiption ms 20 90 109 ing after DCS signal Bit No 2 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 1 0 1 0 Bit 1 2 Delay time from FSK mode to PSK mode this use for G3 mode only V 34 don t need this setting Bit 6 7 If counter equal 1 machine will down to next lower speed for next data phase 185 magicolor 2590MF lt 12 SOFT SW
302. nect the connector 2 Then remove the pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 34 Pressure retraction solenoid 2nd image transfer 504 1 Remove the power supply cooling fan motor See P 60 2 Remove the tab 1 and the guide 2 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C581DA Disconnect the connector 1 Remove the mylar 2 5 Remove the screw 3 and pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 4 7 73 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 35 Temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS 1 Remove the front cover See 33 2 Remove the C clip 1 magicolor 2590MF 4139F2C621DA 3 Remove the tray 1 1 NOTE Use care not to lose the two springs Be careful not to damage the actua tor of the tray1 paper empty sensor 4139F2C622DA 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the temperature humidity sensor 2 4139F2C623DA 74 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 3 36 IDC sensor IDC 1 Remove the transfer belt unit See P 17 2 4139F2C604DA 4139F2C603DA 5 3 37 Torque limiter A Removal procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit See 58 NY 4139fs2512c0 5 Other 2 Remove two screws 1 and the IDC sensor protective cover
303. ng XXXXXXXX Network Interface XXXXXXXXXX DHCP 1 BOOTP 15 IP Address ENGLISH Subnet Mask MODE 1 Gateway Address ON MAC Address ON DNS Server ON DDNS OFF SMTP Server Fax Maintenance 4139 50G2 0900 TX Speed 33 6 kbps 4139 V100 A1 RX Speed 33 6 kbps 4139 V100 A1 TX Level 9 dBm V1 1 RX Level 43 dBm 0 02 DTMF Level 9 dBm CNG Level 11 dBm CED Level 11 dBm Not Installed ECM Mode ON Installed Coding scheme JBIG T C Empty Report OFF Protocol Report OFF XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 0 STANDARD ON 2 OFF TONE LOW ON OFF 0 7 0 5 0 3 0 3 100 0 96 0 100 0 Cartridge Standard Standard High High Fax Counter TX Counter XXXXXX RX Counter XXXXXX Scan Counter XXXXXX Sheets Printed by Paper tray Tray1 XXXXXX Tray2 XXXXXX Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX OFF OFF 172 16 0 224 255 255 255 0 172 16 0 1 00 20 68 76 82 13 DISABLE ENABLE 172 18 17 251 4139F3E567DA 117 magicolor 2590MF S N lt 10 Display mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 B Supplies Status Display the estimated percent of life remaining in the toner cartridge and print unit S The type of the toner cartridges that are installed in the printer is also displayed See the Si table below 8 Types of toner cartridges Standard Standard capacity toner cartridge 1 5 K High High capacity toner cartridge 4 5
304. not exhaustive but they illustrate the reason ing behind this policy Prohibited Actions DANGER Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar object Disabling relay functions such as wedging media between relay contacts Q Disabling safety functions interlocks safety circuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and Q injury Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT Q Using parts not specified by KMBT SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area In that case it is obligation of customer engineer hereafter called the CE to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply Power Cord Set or Power Plug NWARNING Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod uct s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and provided with three conductor cable
305. o matic Document Feeder Use When the original glass is replaced When a new Auto Document Feeder Unit is mounted NOTE After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed Adjustment Specification Adjust the length of E in the copy of the test pattern so that the following specification is met 200 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 1 4139F3C549DA Adjustment Range 2 0 0 2 0 Step 0 4 Setting Procedure 1 Print the test pattern1 See P 131 of the main unit service manual 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select ADF SUB ZOOM of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern1 should be positioned vertically Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check that the width of E in the copy of the test pattern1 meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of E in the document Width of E in the copy x 100 If the width of E is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 6 Press the Menu Select key 7 Using the A Y key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 8 Place the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder Then make a test copy again and check it Adjustment Instructions
306. on Displays the version of the NIC firmware Use 11 6 4 MAIN RAM SIZE Function Displays the size of the main memory Use When checking for the memory size 11 6 5 SERIAL NO Function Displays the serial number of the printer engine Use When checking for the printer serial number 11 6 6 BB CPLD VER Function Displays the version of the BB CPLD version Use When checking for the BB CPLD version 11 6 7 NAND CODE VER Function Displays the version of the NAND flash code version Use When checking for the NAND flash code version 136 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 7 FUNCTION 11 7 1 PAPER FEED TEST N a n _ 5 Function To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections without printing on the paper I Use When a paper misfeed occurs 1 Select the paper tray 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding Setting 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding procedure NOTE It cannot be operated at the time of warming up Don t count 11 7 2 PRINT TEST PATTERN A PATTERN1 Function To print the test pattern for adjusting the image Use If there is tilt or when registration or zoom ratio adjustments are performed 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select PATTERN1 3 Press the B amp W start key to print the test pattern Settin
307. on to accommodate paper Are the actuators operational Correct or change the defective actuator 4 3 2 Misfeed at duplex option reverse drive storage section A Detection timing Type Description Detection of mis feed at duplex The transport sensor PS3 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a predeter option reverse mined period of time after the reverse motor M2 has been energized for reverse drive storage sec drive tion B Action D Relevant electrical parts 8 Transport sensor PS3 AD drive board ADDB E Transport motor M1 Printer control board PRCB Reverse motor M2 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the PS3 sensor ADDB PJ5ADDB 3 B 4 3 for correct operation ADDB Te B 4 Pulse Output 4 Check 2 for correct operation ADDB PASSE 568 B 5 Pulse Output 5 Change ADDB 6 PRCB 17 4 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 3 3 Misfeed at duplex option paper feed section 5 A Detection timing Type Description The paper loop sensor PS1 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a predeter Detection of mis mined period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started feed at duplex The paper loop sensor PS1
308. ons Use SIGNAL TEST This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used RELAY TEST This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used SENSOR TEST This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used DIAL TEST This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used VOLUME TEST To check the volume of the speaker ee RR RAM TEST To test reading and writing of the memory 146 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 SERVICE MODE 11 12 CLEAR DATA 11 12 1 SRAM CLEAR To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their Function default settings The following items are cleared initialization Menu mode Except for USER SETTING DATE amp TIME that keeps its setting value Use Only FAX MAINTENANCE of the user service mode Set to default Only TX RX Result of the Display mode Clear Only SERVICE S CHOICE and SOFT SWITCH of the Service mode Set to default NOTE Before executing SRAM CLEAR be sure to record the setting values that are to be initialized through SRAM CLEAR Forthe record of the setting values it is a good idea to have reports and lists Setting printed procedure Some setting values are not included any of these reports or lists Be sure to make a note of them separately After SRAM CLEAR has been executed make necessa
309. or proper nection and correct as necessary DFCB PAO1DFCB 1 to 4 3 M1 operation check Pulse Output F 14 PS2 sensor check DFCB PAO6DFCB 1 ON F 13 Change DFCB D f 26 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 Jam display 7 3 3 Misfeed at the document transport section A Detection timing Type Description Detection of mis feed at the docu ment transport section The paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 is not blocked even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper feed sensor PS2 has been unblocked Auto Document Feeder Unit Detection of paper The paper feed sensor PS2 is unblocked and the paper leading edge detection left at the document sensor PS3 is blocked when the power switch is turned ON the cover is opened transport section and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Main motor M1 DF control board DFCB Paper feed sensor PS2 Paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Initial check items 2 Check the DFCB connector for proper con u nection and correct as necessary A DFCB PA01DFCB 1 to 4 3 M1 operation check Pulse Output F 14 4 PS2 sensor check DFCB PA06DFCB 1 ON F 13 5 PS3 sensor check DFCB
310. orrectly or E mail headers will be wrong A good ref erence web site may be found at http greenwichmeantime com Available ranges are 12 to 12 in one hour increments The default setting is zero 219 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 62 SOFT SWITCH 60 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 5 8 0 7 0 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 0 4 0 Print mailbox RX 3 image even password are not correct 1 Yes Off hook alarm after N communication 1 Not alarm after communication Display destination 0 Local Name or telephone number 1 selection within TX 0 phase C 1 Remote telephone number Bit 3 If bit 3 set to 1 machine will print out the incoming page even through password is not correct 12 3 63 SOFT SWITCH 61 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting e Bit HEX 2 8 0 7 0 IE Reserved Reserved 0 E 6 0 2 5 0 4 No of rings 1 21314 5167 1 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Max No of ring F 2 No of rings 9 10 41 12 13 14 15 1 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
311. p roller Riz 5 Registration rollers P 13 Auto Document Feeder Unit 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 3 1 Paper feed roller 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the top cover See 9 4139F2C643DA 4139F2C645DA 4139F2C646DA 3 Remove the screw 1 and then remove the mounting plate 2 and spring 3 4 Remove the pick up roller paper feed roller assy 1 5 Remove the paper feed roller 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 3 2 Pick up roller 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the top cover See 9 4139F2C643DA 4139F2C645DA 4139F2C647DA 3 Other 3 Remove the screw 1 and then remove the mounting plate 2 and spring 3 4 Remove the pick up roller paper feed roller assy 1 5 Remove two stoppers 1 and two C rings 2 Then remove shaft 3 6 Remove the pick up roller 4 Auto Document Feeder Unit 7 2 s Auto Document Feeder Unit 5 2 3 3 3 3 Auto Document Feeder Unit 4139F2C676DA 4139F2C633DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 Disconnect the ADF hookup cable 1 NOTE NEVER disconnect and reconnect the ADF hookup cable with the power switch of the machine turned ON as a damaged
312. pages with 10096 687 mm to 1 025 mm Divide into 3 pages with 10096 1 026 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 10096 ON Less than 343 mm 1 page with 10096 344 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 343 mm image length reduction 382 mm to 678 mm Divide into 2 pages with 10096 679 mm to 1 013 mm Divide into 3 pages with 10096 1 014 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 10096 94 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 Menu mode Recording paper size Foot er Length of received image Printing Oficio Less than 335 mm 1 page with 100 336 mm to 385 mm 1 page with 335 mm image length reduction OFF 386 mm to 662 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 663 mm to 989 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 990 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 100 Less than 331 mm 1 page with 100 332 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 331 mm image length reduction ON 382 mm to 654 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 655 mm to 977 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 978 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more with 100 2 100 RX ode All receiving data is divided into 2 pages or more and is printed Recording paper size Foot er Length of received image Printing 4 Less than 289 mm 1 page OFF 290 mm to 570 mm Divide into 2 pages 571
313. r scratched 5 ls thg drum cartridge installed in NO Reinstall the drum cartridge position Drum cartridge ethe ohai Tem s the photo conductor 6 scratched YES the drum cartridge The problem has been eliminated Replace ihe PH unt 7 gt Replace the printer control after performing step 6 board D 2 5 275 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 21 Poor fusing performance offset A Typical faulty images Poor fusing performance Offset CF magicolor 2590MF A036154059c0 4036154060c0 B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Does the paper being used con 1 Paper form to specifications Replace the paper Are the fuser separator levers in 2 Fusing unit the correct position NO The problem has been eliminated Replace the fusing unit 3 after performing step 2 NO gt 4 the printer control D f 276 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 22 Brush effect blurred image A Typical faulty images 17 Miscellaneous errors Brush effect Blurred image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 40361s4061c0 403615403100 Troubleshooting procedure
314. r 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 38 SOFT SWITCH 38 12 SOFT SWITCH set Bit 8 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX Fine tune of 33 6 1 Yes 8 kbps 31 2 kbps 1 receiving speed for 0 No modem default setting V 34 modem Set Reset V 34 trans 0 Reset 7 ee 1 mit level deviation E 6 1 b 2 4 10 V 34 flag number 2 1 5 between ECM frame eas 0 Bit No 5 0 1 1 4 Phase 2 guard tone 551757181242 0 power level 34 1 7 db of normal power level 0 Reserved Reserved 1 2 0 0 No 1 8 34 capability 1 1 Yes This bit set to 1 can get more high speed communication for V 34 at the same line condition 205 magicolor 2590MF N E lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 39 SOFT SWITCH 39 Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 5 v E Disable V 34 TX for 1 Yes M 7 Disable V 34 RX for 1 Yes V 34 modem 0 0 Flags number in FSK Flags number 2 3 4 5 frame for V 34 modem Bit No 6 0 1 1 Bit No 5 1 0 1 4 Manual TX mode for 0 EHE CRI V 34 modem 1 V 17 Switch from V 17 to 0 Yes start V 8 handshaking but only first time 3 V 34 if DIS Bit 6 set 4 0 after receiv
315. r Unit When a media misfeed occurs the printer shows the corresponding media misfeed sta tus by means of the Error indicator on the control panel or LCD display CAUTION ORIGINAL DOC JAM 2 CAUTION OPEN DOC FEED COVER Error 4139F4E514DA Display Misfeed Location oe Action CAUTION Document feeding ORIGINAL DOC JAM section Document transport Top cover CAUTION section OPEN DOC FEED COVER Document exit section P28 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding cover clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the cover a 5 23 Auto Document Feeder Unit 7 Jam display 7 2 Sensor layout Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 1 2 n 3 4139F4C504DA 1 Paper feed sensor 2 Original detection sensor 3 Paper leading edge detection sensor 24 PS2 PS1 PS3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 7 3 Solution 7 3 1 Initial check items 7 Jam display When a media misfeed occurs check the following Check item Action Does the media meet product specifications Change the media 15 the media curled wavy or damp Change the media
316. r YES Replace the 2nd transfer roller D S 5 scratched 9 Paper path Indre foreign objectin tha YES Remove the foreign object paper path 10 Is the fusing entrance guide plate YES Clean Fusing unit dirty or scratched Replace the fusing unit 11 Is the separation claw dirty YES Replace the fusing unit 12 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the toner cartridge after performing step 11 Replace the PH unit 263 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 9 White lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD and colored bands in CD Typical faulty images 5 8 White lines CD White bands in CD Colored lines in CD Colored bands in CD o s B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Are there scratches or lines evi 1 dent on the photo conductor sur YES Replace the drum cartridge face 2 Drum cartridge Is the outside dirty YES Clean Is the connector or contact termi 3 nal of the drum cartridge con NO nected properly Clean the contact terminal or reconnect the connector Is the developing bias contact ter NO Clean the contact terminal or minal in good contact check the terminal position 15 the connector or contact termi 2 Clean the contact terminal
317. r malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts PH unit Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM magicolor 2590MF Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component Check the cable and connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change PH unit 3 PRCB 15 4 7 12H Laser malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts PH unit Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control Signal component Check the cable and connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change PH unit 3 PRCB D 2 5 245 15 Error codes Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 4 8 14h 2nd image transfer pressure retraction failure Pressure retraction solenoid 2nd image transfer SD4 Main motor M1 E Relevant Electrical Parts Retraction position sensor 2nd image Printer control board PRCB 8 transfer PS5 WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i i p Control Signal Location Electrical component 1 Check the M1 connector for proper con A nection and correct as necessary 2 Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the SD4 connector for proper con _ a nection and correct as necessa
318. r per No Change image process ing board 257 magicolor 2590MF D 2 5 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 3 Scanner system Foggy background A Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 40361403050 magicolor 2590MF B Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Sunlight or any other extraneous light YES Protect the copier from extra enters the machine neous light 2 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original a Shading Shading sheet is dirty YES Clean sheet 4 Mirrors Lens Mirrors lens and or original glass are dirty YES Clean Original glass 5 Scanner unit Exposure lamp is dirty YES Change scanner unit PWBs and Connectors are securely connected with Reconnect 6 connection no bent pins and no breaks in the connec NO Replace the connection cables tion cables cable 7 Connectors on the image processing NO lReconnect Image pro board are connected properly cessing board The problem has been eliminated after No Change image processing performing step 7 board D f 258 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 4 Scanner system Black streaks or bands A Typical faulty images 17 Miscellaneous errors
319. rew lock coated screws are loosened or removed be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened magicolor 2590MF B Red painted screws NOTE The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake Do not remove or loosen any of the red painted screws in the field It should also be noted that when two or more screws are used for a single part only one repre sentative screw may be marked with the red paint C Variable resistors on board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting 7 2 D Removal of PWBs N CAUTION When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures Theremoval procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 29 5 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 2 Disassembly assembly list other parts
320. rrect as necessary Tal 3 4 Check the PRCB connector for proper u nection and correct as necessary IPB 1 to 4 5 M5 operation check Pulse Output L 11 Change PRCB E Change DCPU2 Change DCPU1 mE 250 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 4 20 102H Faulty IR exposure lamp 15 Error codes Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner unit Printer control board PRCB Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electrical component Check the exposure lamp for lighting condi tion when the power switch is turned ON and if any faulty symptom is evident cor rect the Scanner Unit Check the PRCB connector for proper con 2 nection and correct as necessary m 3 scanner unit 4 PRCB 15 4 21 ENGINE INTERFACE Communication error between engine controller Relevant Electrical Parts Image processing board IPB Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i Control Signal Location Electrical component 1 Check the IPB connector for proper con ER u nection and correct as necessary 2 Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 3 IPB 4 PRCB 15 4 22 CONTROLLER Controller internal error Relevant Electrical Parts Imag
321. rror code in the display Error CAUTION MACHINE TROUBLE 9 SERVICE CALL 04H 4139F4E511DA 15 2 Trouble code list Code Item Detection Timing 04H Printer control board Communications with the M C expansion IO G A IC on malfunction the printer control board are not properly carried out 05H Flash ROM malfunction Engine firmware upgrading has failed The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter mined consecutive period of time while the main motor remains energized 08H Main motor malfunction The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predeter mined consecutive period of time while the main motor remains deenergized A The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter Ventilation fan motor mal a eur OBH mined consecutive period of time while the ventilation function i fan motor remains energized The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter Power supply cooling fan 0CH mined consecutive period of time while the power sup motor malfunction N ply cooling fan motor remains energized OFH Duplex cooling fanmotor Duplex Option Service Manual P 19 malfunction A low motor lock signal is not detected even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the poly gon motor has been started 10H Polygon motor malfunction The motor lock signal remains
322. rt edge feeding will be identified with S abbreviation for Short edge feeding on the media size No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding S will not be added to the media size lt Sample notation gt Media size Feeding direction Notation ad Long edge feeding A4 Short edge feeding A4S Short edge feeding A3 C 2 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL magicolor 2590MF Main body 2007 08 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page r
323. ry 4 Check the PRCB connector for proper con u _ nection and correct as necessary PS5 sensor check PRCB PJ14PRCB 3 ON Jto K 3 SD4 operation check PRCB PJ11PRCB 2 REM J to K 1 PRCB PJ8PRCB 5 REM 7 operation check PRCB PJ8PRCB 8 LOCK C 4 8 PRCB D f 246 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 15 4 9 15H Cleaning blade pressure retraction failure 15 Error codes Relevant Electrical Parts Retraction position sensor cleaning blade PS6 Pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade SD3 Main motor M1 Printer control board PRCB WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i Control Signal Location Electrical component 1 Check the M1 connector for proper con _ u nection and correct as necessary 2 Check M1 for proper drive coupling and _ correct as necessary 3 Check the SD3 connector for proper con Em u nection and correct as necessary 4 Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary 5 PS6 sensor check PRCB PJ9PRCB 11 ON C 5 6 503 operation check PRCB PJ10PRCB 5 REM C 3 PRCB PJ8PRCB 5 REM 7 operation check PRCB PJ8PRCB 8 LOCK 4 8 PRCB 15 4 10 16H Transfer belt rotation failure Relevant Electrical Parts Belt positioning sensor PS4 Image transfer belt unit Printer control
324. ry entries of data again based on the setting values recorded 11 12 2 MEMORY CLEAR To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their Function default settings The following items are cleared initialization Use Only SERVICE S CHOICE and FIXED ZOOM CHANGE of the Service mode Set to default NOTE Before executing MEMORY CLEAR be sure to record the setting values that are to be initialized through MEMORY CLEAR 7 For the record of the setting values it is good idea to have reports and lists Setting printed procedure Some setting values are not included any of these reports lists Be sure to make a note of them separately After MEMORY CLEAR has been executed make necessary entries of data again based on the setting values recorded 147 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF T 2 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 1 Description This machine is equipped with totally 64 soft switches that are used for fax adjustment in order to conform to the standard of each country The default setting is changeable The default setting of soft switch is automatically changed according to the following set tings The marketing area is set in procedures of USER SETTING gt FAX
325. s out EOM times consecutively but no answer OOF9 Received incorrect response after sending EOR EOM OOFA Received ERR signal after sending EOR EOM OOFB Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending EOM OOFC Did not receive any response after sending CTC OOFD speed down to lower speed in ECM mode OOFE Memory full for transmission OOFF Redial all fail 285 magicolor 2590MF a 5 18 FAX error Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 magicolor 2590MF Blank Page D f 286 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 19 Parts layout drawing Appendix 19 Parts layout drawing 191 Main body magicolor 2590MF 7 6 4139F5C500DA 1 Pressure retraction solenoid cleaning blade 10 Fusing paper loop sensor PS8 SD3 2 Main motor M1 11 Waste toner near full detect board LED WTDTB LED 3 Ventilation fan motor FM2 12 Belt positioning sensor PS4 4 Retraction position sensor cleaning blade PS6 13 Exit sensor PS7 5 Power supply cooling fan motor FM1 14 IR unit open close sensor PS10 6 Retraction position sensor 2nd image transfer 15 Thermistor TH 55 x 7 IDC sensor IDC 16 DC power supply1 DCPU1 8 1 paper pick up solenoid 501 17 Pressure retraction solenoid 2nd image 2 transfer SD4 lt 9 Power swi
326. sconnect the connector 2 of the waste toner near full detect board LED 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 17 NCU board LL 1 Remove the rear cover See 31 2 Remove the left cover 5 See 32 8 S 3 Remove eleven screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 Then remove the image processing board protective cover 3 4139F2C660DA 7 i 4 Remove three screws 1 and the NCU board 2 Then remove the protection film 3 NOTE Make sure to reinstall the protection film 4139F2C661DA 47 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 Other 5 3 18 LAN board 1 Remove the rear cover See P 31 2 Remove the left cover See P 32 4139F2C660DA 4139F2C672DA 48 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Remove eleven screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 Then remove the image processing board protective cover 3 4 Remove four screws 1 and discon nect the connector CN5 2 Then remove the LAN board 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 19 Scanner unit 3 Disconnect the flat cable 3 and remove the scanner unit 4 NOTE When reinstalling the scanner unit pass the belt through portion 5 LL 1 Remove the original glass unit See P 34 Q 1 4 2 Remove the shaft 1 and belt 2 2
327. sconnect the connector PJ20 1 and the flat cable PJ19 2 from the printer control board 14 Disconnect the connector P3 1 from the image processing board 15 Press the rack release lever 1 and then rotate the rack 2 so that the toner cartridge 3 is moved to a position at which the toner cartridge can be easily removed NOTE When rotating the rack use care not to touch the developing roller 55 magicolor 2590MF 7 i magicolor 2590MF Other 4139F2C569DA 18 Remove the drum cartridge See P16 4139fs2538c0 2 4139F2C570DA 56 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 16 Hold onto the handle pull it and remove the toner cartridge 1 17 Repeat steps 14 and 15 to remove all toner cartridges NOTE Position the removed drum car tridge as shown in the illustration at the left Be sure to keep the drum cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty Do not leave the drum cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes and do not place the removed drum cartridge in a location where it will be exposed to direct light such as sunlight 19 Remove the PH unit cover right 1 left 2 NOTE Through the hole 3 at the location shown on the left push the tab of the PH unit cover and remove the PH unit cover Note the connector connected to the PH unit
328. sion Use The SESSION FUNCTION TIME NO DESTINATION STATION and PAGE are printed Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 21 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the MEMORY DATA LIST and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 5 MEMORY IMAGE PRINT Function A reduced image of the first page of the document waiting to be sent in addition to the SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME and Use PAGE are printed Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 2 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the MEMORY IMAGE PRINT and then press the Menu Select key 115 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF 2 lt 10 Display mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 10 6 6 ONE TOUCH LIST Function The recipients programmed in the one touch dial keys are printed in numerical order of Use the keys Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 21 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the ONE TOUCH LIST and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 7 SPEED DIAL LIST
329. ss Setting procedure If Auto is selected for IP ADDRESS the items of SUBNET MASK and GATE WAY are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY 103 magicolor 2590MF 25 lt 8 Menu mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 42 3 GATEWAY S Function This function is used to specify the default gateway IP address of a router on the net ed work 9 8 Use NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the gate way to use Setting LAN address Setting NOTE procedure If Auto is selected for IP ADDRESS the items of SUBNET MASK and GATE WAY are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY 8 124 DNS CONFIG Function This function is used to enable or disable the DNS Domain Name System setting If there is a DNS server on your network enter the IP address of the DNS server Ifthe DNS server is located within your local network select ENABLE If you are using the DNS server of an Internet service provider ISP or some other DNS server located Use outside your local network select DISABLE NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for details Setting The default setting is DISABLE procedure DISABLE ENABLE 8 125 DD
330. ssembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked screws NOTE To prevent loose screws a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened Lower Feeder Unit B Red painted screws NOTE The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake Do not remove or loosen any of the red painted screws in the field It should also be noted that when two or more screws are used for a single part only one repre sentative screw may be marked with the red paint C Variable resistors on board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given Adjustment Setting 5 2 D Removal of PWBs N CAUTION When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other el
331. t No 4 Bit No 3 Bit No 2 Bit No 1 alolo a S 72 lt o of o of gt Rx level Reserved Bit No 4 Bit No 3 Bit No 2 Bit No 1 Bit 8 This bit set to 1 the answer machine will send machine by NSF frame after connection Bit 7 Can input Pause key to insert pause time between digits this can put more than one P at the end of telephone number to increase calling time T after calling 177 magicolor 2590MF T lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 4 SOFT SWITCH 04 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 Reserved Reserved 0 5 0 0 Visible alarm for RTN 1 Yes display message while sending receiving RTN signal RTN Retrain Negative 4 signal 3 Audible alarm for RTN signal 0 No 2 Reserved Reserved Polarity change detec tion 1 Detect line phase reverse during dialing amp calling 1 1 Yes alarm for sending or receiving RTN signal 0 Not to detect phase reverse during dialing amp calling 0
332. t resolution 2400 x 600 dpi 1200 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi Copy resolution 600 x 600 dpi Platen Stationary Original scanning Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD Registration Rear left edge Paper feeding system Tray1 200 sheets Tray2 500 sheets Option Developing system Single element developing system Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system Image transfer system Intermediate transfer belt system Paper separating system Curvature separation charge neutralizing system Fusing system Roller fusing Paper exit system Face down Output tray capacity 100 sheets Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Product specifications B Functions Average 45 seconds 100 V area 5 Warm up time Average 49 seconds 200 240 V area a at ambient temperature of 23 C 73 4 F and rated source voltage 5 Plain paper 126 78 mm second 2 System speed Thick stock 63 39 mm second film 42 26 mm second First page out time Full color 22 seconds or less LetterS A4S Plain paper Monochrome 13 seconds or less LetterS A4S First copy time Full color 52 seconds 600 x 300 dpi scan Plain paper Monochrome 23 seconds 600 x 300 dpi scan Copy Print speed Full color 5 pages minute Plain paper Monochrome 20 pages minute Plain paper and letterhead
333. t the tray 1 See 1 2 4056F2C504DA 3 3 5 Paper pick up unit 1 Remove the rear cover See P 7 4056F2C505DA 4056F2C506DA 3 Other 2 Remove four screws 1 and remove the rear cover 2 2 Unlock two tabs 1 and remove the cover 2 3 Remove the actuator 1 Lower Feeder Unit 7 i 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4 Remove the screw 1 and the metal plate 2 Lower Feeder Unit 4056F2C507DA 5 Remove five screws 1 disconnect the connector 2 and remove the paper pick up unit 3 3 3 6 PF drive board PFDB 1 Remove the paper pick up unit See 7 2 Disconnect two connectors 1 from the PF drive board 3 Remove one screw 2 and the PF drive board protective cover 3 1 2 4056F2C509DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other m 4 Remove two screws 1 and the PF drive board 2 Lower Feeder Unit 2 4056F2C510DA 3 3 7 Paper pick up solenoid SD1 1 Remove the paper pick up unit See P 7 2 Disconnect the connector 1 3 Remove the screw 2 and the pro tective cover 3 7 gt 4056F2C511DA 4 Remove the screw 1 and the paper 2 pick up solenoid 2 4056F2C512DA 3 Other Field Service Ver
334. t8 If error line above definition machine will send RTN signal instead of MCF signal This will cause the other party send the same page again 182 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 9 SOFT SWITCH 09 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 Ringer 0 frequency MUSTE 20 to 57 5 20 to 75 10 to 75 Ringer frequency range Hz detection BINGE 7 l Bit No 7 1 0 1 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 TSI CSI append 1 Automatically insert 0 Not append before send out TSI CSI 0 4 0 Reserved Reserved 2 Time from RX DIS Description 180 240ms 0 signal to send DCS Bit No 2 1 1 q signal Bit No 1 0 1 0 Bit 5 This bit set to 1 the character will put in the first position on CSI and TSI com mand 183 magicolor 2590MF 72 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 10 SOFT SWITCH 10 0 Not to Print 5 Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting 9 Bit HEX 5 v E Print out RTN page 1 Print Out RTN page report after transaction for TX 1 report RX RTN signal 7 Confirmation report 0 Print OK result field 1 Print NG in case of sending or recei
335. tch SW1 18 Exit tray full sensor PS11 287 magicolor 2590MF 2 5 f lt 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F5C507DA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 288 Printer control board PRCB Fusing motor M4 Speaker SP Developing motor M3 Safety switch SW2 Rack motor M2 Rack positioning sensor PS3 USB board USB Temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS Tray1 paper empty sensor PS9 Registration roller solenoid SD2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 sensor PS2 DC power supply2 DCPU2 High voltage unit HV Fusing safety switch SW3 LAN board LANB NCU board NCUB Image processing board IPB Scanner motor M5 Registration sensor PS1 Original Cover Set Switch SW4 IR cooling fan motor FM3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 19 Parts layout drawing 19 2 Auto Document Feeder Unit magicolor 2590MF 3 4139F5C502DA 1 DF control board DFCB 5 Paper feed clutch CL1 2 Paper feed sensor PS2 6 Door set switch SW1 3 Original detection sensor PS1 7 Main motor M1 4 Paper leading edge detection sensor PS3 5 e lt 289 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 19 3 Duplex Option Option magicolor 2590MF 4057F2C522DA 1 Reverse motor
336. ted 114 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 10 Display mode 10 6 PRINT REPORT 10 6 1 TX RESULT REPORT Function The SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME Use PAGE DURATION MODE and RESULT are printed Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key P 3 Select the TX RESULT REPORT and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 2 RX RESULT REPORT Function The SESSION FUNCTION DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME Use PAGE DURATION MODE and RESULT are printed Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the RX RESULT REPORT and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 3 ACTIVITY REPORT Function The NO SESSION DATE TIME TX RX DESTINATION STATION PAGE Use DURATION MODE and RESULT are printed Setting 1 Press the Display key then the W key three times 25 2 Check that the PRINT REPORT screen appears and then press the Menu Select key 3 Select the ACTIVITY REPORT and then press the Menu Select key 10 6 4 MEMORY DATA LIST Function This is a list of documents waiting to be sent and documents specified for timer trans mis
337. the IPB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary Change ADDB Change PRCB Change IPB fe c a 20 KONICA MINOLTA 2007 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information ci
338. the product may slide leading to a injury Inspection before Servicing CAUTION Before conducting an inspection read all relevant docu mentation service manual technical notices etc and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro cedure using only the prescribed tools Do not make any qa adjustment not described in the documentation If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the prod uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet some amp units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF A risk of electric shock exists The area around the fixing unit is hot You may get burnt S 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On NWARNING Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of elec A tric shock exists Safety Checkpoints NW
339. ting environment of the main body NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 2 Periodic check Maintenance 2 Periodic check 21 Maintenance procedure Periodic parts check Auto Document Feeder Unit 2 1 1 Separator pad A Periodically replaced parts cycle Separation pad Every 50 000 prints B Removal procedure 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove two tabs 1 and separator cover 2 gt 1 4139F2C641DA 3 Remove two screws 1 and the sep arator pad 2 NOTE Be extremely careful not to lose the spring on the separator pad 4139F2C642DA 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 3 Other 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked screws NOTE To prevent loose screws a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened Auto Document Feeder Unit B Red painted screws NOTE The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake Do not remove or loosen
340. tion of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2007 08 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 CONTENTS Lower Feeder Unit General 1 Product t t reae d Flare REEL 1 Maintenance 2 Periodic GNEC ottenere baee neo tne nan 3 2 1 Maintenance
341. tion report when an error occurs 110 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 User service mode 9 3 USAGE 9 3 1 TRANSFER BELT Function Displays the remaining life of the transfer belt Use To check the remaining life of the maintenance service parts magicolor 2590MF 9 3 2 FUSER UNIT Function Displays the remaining life of the fusing unit Use To check the remaining life of the maintenance service parts 9 3 3 TRANSFER ROLLER Function Displays the remaining life of the transfer roller Use To check the remaining life of the maintenance service parts 94 RESET COUNT 9 4 1 TRANSFER BELT Resets the counter value of the transfer belt unit Function ie a gs Executes the image stabilization sequence Use To reset the transfer belt unit counter after the transfer belt unit is replaced 1 Enter the user service mode and call 3 RESET COUNT to the screen 2 Select TRANSFER BELT and press the Menu Select key Setting 3 Press the Menu Select key procedure 4 OFF the machine s main switch 5 When the machine s main switch is turned ON the image stabilization is automatically executed E lt 9 4 2 FUSER UNIT Function Resets the counter value of the fuser unit Use To reset the fuser unit counter after the fuser unit is replaced
342. tment repair maintenance etc need to be conducted with utmost care A DANGER Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injur A WARNING Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury A CAUTION Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows Precaution when servicing A A A the product General Electric hazard High precaution temperature Prohibition when servicing NV the product General Do not touch Do not prohibition with wet hand disassemble Direction when servicing the Q e product General Unplug Ground Earth instruction 5 1 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited the points listed below are
343. to a basic cause or causes Section Step Check Item Result Action 1 Recommended paper is used NO Instruct user Paper Replace paper 2 Paper is damp YES Instruct user on proper paper storage Original not flat YES Correct Faint original light pencil etc YES Instruct user Original i igi i 9 5 Highly transparent original OHP transparencies YES Instruct user etc 6 Dirty or scratched original glass YES Clean or Replace PM parts 7 PM parts relating to image formation have YES Clean or Replace reached the end of cleaning replacement cycles Adjustment 8 There are settings that can be readjusted to rem YES Readjust items edy the image failure D f 254 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 Miscellaneous errors 17 1 2 Initial check items 2 LL Determine if the failure is attributable to the scanner system or the printer system 5 N Check Item Result Cause 5 8 Full size Reduction Make copies at different zoom ratios Scanner system Full size Reduction D 2 5 255 17 Miscellaneous errors Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 17 2 Solution 17 2 1 Scanner system Blank copy or black copy A Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy magicolor 2590MF 403616403800 40361640390 Troubleshooting proc
344. tting is From mc2590MF procedure Up to 20 characters be entered for the default subject 8 14 SCANNER SETTING 8 14 1 RESOLUTION Function The default settings for resolution used by the scan to e mail functions be specified Setting The default setting is 300 x 300 procedure 150 x 150 300 x 300 600 x 600 8 44 2 IMAGE FORMAT Function 2 lt The default settings for data format used by the scan to e mail functions can be speci Use fied Setting The default setting is PDF procedure TIFF PDF 8 143 CODING METHOD Function The default settings for coding method used by the scan to e mail functions can be Use specified Setting The default setting is MH procedure MH MR MMR 106 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 User service mode 9 1 User service mode function tree A Procedure 9 User service mode 7 On the initial screen press the Menu Select key to call MACHINE SETTING to the screen Keep on pressing 4 key over two seconds B Exiting Press the Stop Reset key MAINTENANCE 1 FAX MAINTENANCE TX SPEED P 108 RX SPEED P 108 TX LEVEL P 108 RX LEVEL P 108 DTMF LEVEL P 108 CNG LEVEL P 109 CED LEVEL P 109 ECM MODE 109
345. type that came with this product make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product When securing measure is provided secure the cord with the fixture properly If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the prod uct securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire Check whether the power cord is not stepped on pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cord with plug and connector on each end specified by KMBT Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the cable The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and electric shock S 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring NWARNING Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in th
346. ubleshooting Appendix magicolor 2590MF 2 lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 8 6 3 92 8 7 JEXCSETNEING 93 8 7 1 MEMORY RX MODE cece 93 8 7 2 NOO RINGS 93 8 7 3 REDUCTION RX 93 8 7 4 RA PRIN e M 97 8 7 5 RX MODE tee iiiter ie ti E ed b been 98 8 7 6 98 8 7 7 SELECT RAY meriti 98 8 8 COMM SETTING 99 8 8 1 TEL LINE TYPE tertiis 99 8 8 2 LINE MONITOR rii nett ica t teda taces 99 8 8 3 PSTN PBX ctt eitis 99 89 asr eniin 100 8 9 1 ACTIVITY REPORT rre ice 100 8 9 2 perit 100 8 9 3 HX RESULT REPORT 100 810 USER SE MING acrea tede teca in Foe FER E 101 8104 FAX PTT SETTING ttti ttti tbi 101 8 10 2 amp TIME 101 8 10 3 DATE FORMAT 101 8 104 PRESET ZOOM 101 810 5 USER EAXINOR 102 8 10 6 USERNAME 102 8 14 DIRECT PRINT 102 8111 IMAGE QUALITY 102 8 11 2 PAPER SIZE 102 81122 NUP LAYOUT
347. urs 212 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 51 SOFT SWITCH 51 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 Reserved Reserved 0 6 0 5 0 4 Print report Print report 0 foreach while reporting Not T30 monitor report used transaction error selection 5 1 i 3 0 Bit No 3 1 0 1 0 2 mode for memory 0 transmission 1 from start page 1 Reserved Reserved 0 12 3 52 SOFT SWITCH 52 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 213 magicolor 2590MF S 72 lt 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 53 SOFT SWITCH 53 5 m Initial gt Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX 5 8 0 7 0 0 6 0 5 0 Reserved Reserved 4 0 3 0 0 2 0 1 0 12 3 54 SOFT SWITCH 54 Initial Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit HEX Report 0 Digits format i Date Time type 1 Alpha numeric format When bit No 8 is 1 7 2006 0 2 Date Time MAR 25 Bit No
348. vant electrical parts Cooling fan motor FM1 Printer control board PRCB DC power supply1 DCPU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Check the FM1 connector for proper con u m nection and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and m _ correct as necessary 3 Check the PRCB connector for proper con u nection and correct as necessary ADDB PJ3ADDB 6 REM 5 4 operation check ADDB 8 LOCK G 4 to 5 5 PRCB 6 Change DCPU1 mE x 19 Duplex Option 5 6 Miscellaneous malfunctions Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 6 Miscellaneous malfunctions 61 List of miscellaneous malfunctions Display Description Duplex Option SIZE TYPE ERROR A 2 sided print cycle is run using the type and size of paper that are not good DUPLEX for 2 sided printing 6 2 Duplex size Type error Relevant electrical parts AD drive board ADDB Printer control board PRCB Image processing board IPB WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electrical Control signal component 1 Check the printer driver settings Check the ADDB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary Check the PRCB connector for proper con nection and correct as necessary Check
349. vice Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 Remove the left hinge C clip 1 and right hinge C clip 2 of the IR unit 13 Remove the stopper 1 and the IR unit 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 5 Other 5 3 21 PH unit A CAUTION Do notreplace the PH unit while the machine is turned ON The laser beam that may be emitted can blind you magicolor 2590MF The laser beam that may be emitted can blind you Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust the PH unit 1 Remove the rear cover See 31 2 Remove the right cover See P 32 3 Remove the left cover See P 32 4 Remove the front cover See P 33 5 Remove the IR unit See P 50 7 2 gt 6 Remove two screws 1 and the fix ing base 2 7 Remove the screw 1 and the top right cover 2 4139F2C562DA 53 magicolor 2590MF 5 2 5 Other 8 Remove the speaker See P 80 4139F2C563DA 4139F2C595DA 4139F2C565DA 54 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 9 Remove nine screws 1 and the right frame 2 10 Remove the screw 1 bracket 2 and the guide 3 11 Remove the wiring saddle 1 12 Remove the screw 2 and the har ness cover 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 4139F2C566DA 4139F2C674DA 4139F2C568DA 5 Other 13 Di
350. ving RTN signal A 6 1 Get gap time between ms 550 650 850 digit for pulse dial Bit No 6 0 0 1 5 Bit No 5 0 1 1 RX PIP T 30 0 Send DCS at current speed 4 mand after send out m 5 0 MPS command 1 Return to Tx phase B waiting for DIS signal 3 Received DIS signal eee ToT MT ECET 0 within reception 1 Disconnected after sending DCN signal 1 Transmission time lim 1 Limit to 8 minutes from data phase 2 0 itation 0 No any limitation until document jam Audio alarm after 0 Not to alarm after transaction fail 1 communication fail 1 Alarm 3 seconds after disconnected Bit 8 If this bit set to 1 machine will print out confirmation report after each transaction Bit 7 If this bit set to1 the result field will show NG instead of OK the confirmation report and activity report or checking the result on the LCD e Bit 2 This for Manual Tx only lt 184 Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 SOFT SWITCH set 12 3 11 SOFT SWITCH 11 LL Initial 2 Bit No Designation Function Setting Bit E 8 Reserved Reserved 0 7 0 pre fix number 1 Yes Pulse dial allowed to 0 Yes 2 select 1 Not allowed 5 Protocol signal Dis 0 Not to display 0 play mode 1 Display V8 or T30 comma
351. void areas white spots Use occurs due to the characteristics of the type of media being used If white spots occur decrease the 2nd transfer voltage adjust in the minus direction If void areas occurs increase the 2nd transfer voltage adjust in the plus direction The default setting is OV Adjustment range 1500V 1500V Setting Step 100V procedure Types of paper to be adjusted PLAIN TRANS LABELS LETTERHEAD J POSTCARD THICK STOCK GLOSSY 133 magicolor 2590MF lt magicolor 2590MF 2 lt 11 SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 11 413 VPP OFFSET Optimizes the image by varying the output value of the developing bias when image Function problem occurs due to the atmospheric pressure at high altitudes To adjust the developing when an image problem uneven density occurs in an environ Use ment of low atmospheric pressure places such as at high altitudes Setting The default setting is STEPO procedure Adjustment range STEPO OV STEP1 100V STEP2 200V STEP3 300V 11 4 14 ROHS Function Sets supportability of the temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS for RoHS Use When the temperature humidity sensor has been replaced with a new one Setting The default s
352. ween Greenwich mean time T mean time 08 00 08 30 09 00 09 30 1 Bit No 6 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 5 1 1 1 1 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 217 12 SOFT SWITCH set Field Service Ver 1 0 Aug 2007 12 3 60 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 2 5 E Initial Es Bit No Designation Function Setting 8 Bit HEX Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 6 Bit No 6 0 0 0 0 0 Bit No 5 1 1 1 1 Bit No 4 0 0 0 0 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 3 Time between Greenwich mean time T 0 mean time 12 00 00 30 01 00 01 30 Bit No 6 0 1 1 1 Bit No 5 1 0 0 0 Bit No 4 1 0 0 0 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 4 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 0 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 02 00 02 30 03 00 03 30 Time Between GMT 5 L L 1 1 Greenwich Mean BEN T 7 T m m 3 Time 1 Bit No 3 1 1 1 1 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 5 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 E Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 5 2 Bit No 6 1 1 1 1 0 Bit No 5 0 0 0 0 Bit No 4 1 1 1 1 Bit No 3 0 0 0 0 Bit No 2 0 0 1 1 Bit No 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 06 00
353. wing specification is met 20x 2 5 mm Adjustment Specification 4139F3C547DA Adjustment 5 0 5 0 mm 0 0 mm 5 0 5 0 mm Range Step 0 5 mm 1 Print the test pattern1 See P 131 of the main unit service manual 2 Enter the 2 ADJUST menu in the service mode 3 Select ADF SUB REGIST of 2 ADJUST and press the Menu Select key 4 Place the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE Setting The test 1 should be positioned vertically Procedure 17 Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into tray1 to make the test copy 5 Check that the width of C in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 6 Press the Menu Select key 7 Using the A Y key change the setting value and then press the Menu Select key 8 Place the test pattern1 into the Automatic Document Feeder Then make a test copy again and check it f the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Adjustment Increase the setting Instructions e If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width ius Decrease the setting 19 Auto Document Feeder Unit 25 lt Auto Document Feeder Unit T lt 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 Mechanical adjustm

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Agilent 54855A Datasheet  Multiprotocol Rail Reader User Guide  ° Funkkopfhörer MH-2001 H  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file